82P2816BBG

16(+1) Channel High-Density T1/E1/J1 Line Interface Unit IDT82P2816 Version 3 February 6, 2009 6024 Silver Creek Valley Road, San Jose, California 95138 Telephone: 1-800-345-7015 or 408-284-8200• TWX: 910-338-2070 • FAX: 408-284-2775 Printed in U.S.A. © 2009 Integrated Device Technology, Inc. DISCLAIMER Integrated Device Technology, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to its products or specifications at any time, without notice, in order to improve design or performance and to supply the best possible product. IDT does not assume any responsibility for use of any circuitry described other than the circuitry embodied in an IDT product. The Company makes no representations that circuitry described herein is free from patent infringement or other rights of third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent, patent rights or other rights, of Integrated Device Technology, Inc. LIFE SUPPORT POLICY Integrated Device Technology's products are not authorized for use as critical components in life support devices or systems unless a specific written agreement pertaining to such intended use is executed between the manufacturer and an officer of IDT. 1. Life support devices or systems are devices or systems which (a) are intended for surgical implant into the body or (b) support or sustain life and whose failure to perform, when properly used in accordance with instructions for use provided in the labeling, can be reasonably expected to result in a significant injury to the user. 2. A critical component is any components of a life support device or system whose failure to perform can be reasonably expected to cause the failure of the life support device or system, or to affect its safety or effectiveness. Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 LIST OF TABLES .................................................................................................................................................................... 7 LIST OF FIGURES ................................................................................................................................................................... 8 FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10 APPLICATIONS...................................................................................................................................................................... 11 DESCRIPTION........................................................................................................................................................................ 11 BLOCK DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................................................................. 12 1 PIN ASSIGNMENT .......................................................................................................................................................... 13 2 PIN DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 14 3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................................ 24 3.1 T1 / E1 / J1 MODE SELECTION .............................................................................................................................. 24 3.2 RECEIVE PATH ....................................................................................................................................................... 24 3.2.1 Rx Termination ............................................................................................................................................ 24 3.2.1.1 Receive Differential Mode ........................................................................................................... 24 3.2.1.2 Receive Single Ended Mode ....................................................................................................... 26 3.2.2 Equalizer ..................................................................................................................................................... 27 3.2.2.1 Line Monitor ................................................................................................................................ 27 3.2.2.2 Receive Sensitivity ...................................................................................................................... 27 3.2.3 Slicer ........................................................................................................................................................... 28 3.2.4 Rx Clock & Data Recovery ......................................................................................................................... 28 3.2.5 Decoder ...................................................................................................................................................... 28 3.2.6 Receive System Interface ........................................................................................................................... 28 3.2.7 Receiver Power Down ................................................................................................................................ 29 3.3 TRANSMIT PATH .................................................................................................................................................... 29 3.3.1 Transmit System Interface .......................................................................................................................... 29 3.3.2 Tx Clock Recovery ...................................................................................................................................... 30 3.3.3 Encoder ....................................................................................................................................................... 30 3.3.4 Waveform Shaper ....................................................................................................................................... 30 3.3.4.1 Preset Waveform Template ........................................................................................................ 30 3.3.4.2 User-Programmable Arbitrary Waveform .................................................................................... 32 3.3.5 Line Driver ................................................................................................................................................... 34 3.3.5.1 Transmit Over Current Protection ............................................................................................... 34 3.3.6 Tx Termination ............................................................................................................................................ 34 3.3.6.1 Transmit Differential Mode .......................................................................................................... 34 3.3.6.2 Transmit Single Ended Mode ...................................................................................................... 35 3.3.7 Transmitter Power Down ............................................................................................................................ 36 3.3.8 Output High-Z on TTIP and TRING ............................................................................................................ 36 3.4 JITTER ATTENUATOR (RJA & TJA) ....................................................................................................................... 37 Table of Contents 3 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 3.5 DIAGNOSTIC FACILITIES ....................................................................................................................................... 3.5.1 Bipolar Violation (BPV) / Code Violation (CV) Detection and BPV Insertion .............................................. 3.5.1.1 Bipolar Violation (BPV) / Code Violation (CV) Detection ............................................................. 3.5.1.2 Bipolar Violation (BPV) Insertion ................................................................................................. 3.5.2 Excessive Zeroes (EXZ) Detection ............................................................................................................. 3.5.3 Loss of Signal (LOS) Detection ................................................................................................................... 3.5.3.1 Line LOS (LLOS) ......................................................................................................................... 3.5.3.2 System LOS (SLOS) ................................................................................................................... 3.5.3.3 Transmit LOS (TLOS) ................................................................................................................. 3.5.4 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Detection and Generation ............................................................................ 3.5.4.1 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Detection ...................................................................................... 3.5.4.2 (Alarm Indication Signal) AIS Generation ................................................................................... 3.5.5 PRBS, QRSS, ARB and IB Pattern Generation and Detection ................................................................... 3.5.5.1 Pattern Generation ...................................................................................................................... 3.5.5.2 Pattern Detection ........................................................................................................................ 3.5.6 Error Counter .............................................................................................................................................. 3.5.6.1 Automatic Error Counter Updating .............................................................................................. 3.5.6.2 Manual Error Counter Updating .................................................................................................. 3.5.7 Receive /Transmit Multiplex Function (RMF / TMF) Indication ................................................................... 3.5.7.1 RMFn Indication .......................................................................................................................... 3.5.7.2 TMFn Indication .......................................................................................................................... 3.5.8 Loopback .................................................................................................................................................... 3.5.8.1 Analog Loopback ........................................................................................................................ 3.5.8.2 Remote Loopback ....................................................................................................................... 3.5.8.3 Digital Loopback .......................................................................................................................... 3.5.8.4 Dual Loopback ............................................................................................................................ 3.5.9 Channel 0 Monitoring .................................................................................................................................. 3.5.9.1 G.772 Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 3.5.9.2 Jitter Measurement (JM) ............................................................................................................. 3.6 CLOCK INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ............................................................................................................................ 3.6.1 Free Running Clock Outputs on CLKT1/CLKE1 ......................................................................................... 3.6.2 Clock Outputs on REFA/REFB ................................................................................................................... 3.6.2.1 REFA/REFB in Clock Recovery Mode ........................................................................................ 3.6.2.2 Frequency Synthesizer for REFA Clock Output .......................................................................... 3.6.2.3 Free Run Mode for REFA Clock Output ...................................................................................... 3.6.2.4 REFA/REFB Driven by External CLKA/CLKB Input .................................................................... 3.6.2.5 REFA and REFB in Loss of Signal (LOS) or Loss of Clock Condition ........................................ 3.6.3 MCLK, Master Clock Input .......................................................................................................................... 3.6.4 XCLK, Internal Reference Clock Input ........................................................................................................ 3.7 INTERRUPT SUMMARY ......................................................................................................................................... 4 MISCELLANEOUS .......................................................................................................................................................... 4.1 RESET ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4.1.1 Power-On Reset ......................................................................................................................................... 4.1.2 Hardware Reset .......................................................................................................................................... 4.1.3 Global Software Reset ................................................................................................................................ Table of Contents 4 38 38 38 38 38 39 39 40 41 42 42 42 43 43 44 45 45 46 47 47 48 49 49 50 51 52 54 54 55 56 56 57 57 57 57 57 57 61 61 62 64 64 65 65 65 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 5 6 7 8 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 4.1.4 Per-Channel Software Reset ...................................................................................................................... 65 4.2 MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE ......................................................................................................................... 65 4.3 POWER UP .............................................................................................................................................................. 66 4.4 HITLESS PROTECTION SWITCHING (HPS) SUMMARY ...................................................................................... 66 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION ................................................................................................................................... 69 5.1 REGISTER MAP ...................................................................................................................................................... 69 5.1.1 Global Register ........................................................................................................................................... 69 5.1.2 Per-Channel Register ................................................................................................................................. 70 5.2 REGISTER DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................................... 73 5.2.1 Global Register ........................................................................................................................................... 73 5.2.2 Per-Channel Register ................................................................................................................................. 81 JTAG ............................................................................................................................................................................. 113 6.1 JTAG INSTRUCTION REGISTER (IR) .................................................................................................................. 113 6.2 JTAG DATA REGISTER ........................................................................................................................................ 113 6.2.1 Device Identification Register (IDR) .......................................................................................................... 113 6.2.2 Bypass Register (BYP) ............................................................................................................................. 113 6.2.3 Boundary Scan Register (BSR) ................................................................................................................ 113 6.3 TEST ACCESS PORT (TAP) CONTROLLER ....................................................................................................... 113 THERMAL MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................................................... 115 7.1 JUNCTION TEMPERATURE ................................................................................................................................. 115 7.2 EXAMPLE OF JUNCTION TEMPERATURE CALCULATION ............................................................................... 115 7.3 HEATSINK EVALUATION ..................................................................................................................................... 115 PHYSICAL AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... 116 8.1 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS ......................................................................................................................... 116 8.2 RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS .................................................................................................... 117 8.3 DEVICE POWER CONSUMPTION AND DISSIPATION (TYPICAL) 1 ................................................................. 118 8.4 DEVICE POWER CONSUMPTION AND DISSIPATION (MAXIMUM) 1 ............................................................... 119 8.5 D.C. CHARACTERISTICS ..................................................................................................................................... 120 8.6 E1 RECEIVER ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................................. 121 8.7 T1/J1 RECEIVER ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................... 122 8.8 E1 TRANSMITTER ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................................... 123 8.9 T1/J1 TRANSMITTER ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................. 124 8.10 TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER TIMING CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................... 125 8.11 CLKE1 TIMING CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................................................... 127 8.12 JITTER ATTENUATION CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................................................... 128 8.13 MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE TIMING ......................................................................................................... 131 8.13.1 Serial Microprocessor Interface ................................................................................................................ 131 8.13.2 Parallel Motorola Non-Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface ................................................................... 133 8.13.2.1 Read Cycle Specification .......................................................................................................... 133 8.13.2.2 Write Cycle Specification .......................................................................................................... 134 8.13.3 Parallel Intel Non-Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface ........................................................................... 135 8.13.3.1 Read Cycle Specification .......................................................................................................... 135 8.13.3.2 Write Cycle Specification .......................................................................................................... 136 Table of Contents 5 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.13.4 Parallel Motorola Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface ........................................................................... 137 8.13.4.1 Read Cycle Specification .......................................................................................................... 137 8.13.4.2 Write Cycle Specification .......................................................................................................... 138 8.13.5 Parallel Intel Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface .................................................................................. 139 8.13.5.1 Read Cycle Specification .......................................................................................................... 139 8.13.5.2 Write Cycle Specification .......................................................................................................... 140 8.14 JTAG TIMING CHARACTERISTICS ..................................................................................................................... 141 GLOSSARY ......................................................................................................................................................................... 142 INDEX .................................................................................................................................................................................. 144 ORDERING INFORMATION ................................................................................................................................................ 146 Table of Contents 6 February 6, 2009 List of Tables Table-1 Table-2 Table-3 Table-4 Table-5 Table-6 Table-7 Table-8 Table-9 Table-10 Table-11 Table-12 Table-13 Table-14 Table-15 Table-16 Table-17 Table-18 Table-19 Table-20 Table-21 Table-22 Table-23 Table-24 Table-25 Table-26 Table-27 Operation Mode Selection ........................................................................................................................................................................... Impedance Matching Value in Receive Differential Mode ........................................................................................................................... Multiplex Pin Used in Receive System Interface ......................................................................................................................................... Multiplex Pin Used in Transmit System Interface ........................................................................................................................................ PULS[3:0] Setting in T1/J1 Mode ................................................................................................................................................................. PULS[3:0] Setting in E1 Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................... Transmit Waveform Value for T1 0 ~ 133 ft ................................................................................................................................................. Transmit Waveform Value for T1 133 ~ 266 ft ............................................................................................................................................. Transmit Waveform Value for T1 266 ~ 399 ft ............................................................................................................................................. Transmit Waveform Value for T1 399 ~ 533 ft ............................................................................................................................................. Transmit Waveform Value for T1 533 ~ 655 ft ............................................................................................................................................. Transmit Waveform Value for E1 75 ohm .................................................................................................................................................... Transmit Waveform Value for E1 120 ohm .................................................................................................................................................. Transmit Waveform Value for J1 0 ~ 655 ft ................................................................................................................................................. Impedance Matching Value in Transmit Differential Mode .......................................................................................................................... EXZ Definition .............................................................................................................................................................................................. LLOS Criteria ............................................................................................................................................................................................... SLOS Criteria ............................................................................................................................................................................................... TLOS Detection Between Two Channels .................................................................................................................................................... AIS Criteria ................................................................................................................................................................................................... RMFn Indication ........................................................................................................................................................................................... TMFn Indication ........................................................................................................................................................................................... Clock Output on CLKT1 ............................................................................................................................................................................... Clock Output on CLKE1 ............................................................................................................................................................................... Interrupt Summary ....................................................................................................................................................................................... After Reset Effect Summary ........................................................................................................................................................................ Microprocessor Interface ............................................................................................................................................................................. List of Tables 7 24 25 28 30 31 31 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 34 38 39 40 41 42 47 48 56 56 62 64 65 February 6, 2009 List of Figures Figure-1 Figure-2 Figure-3 Figure-4 Figure-5 Figure-6 Figure-7 Figure-8 Figure-9 Figure-10 Figure-11 Figure-12 Figure-13 Figure-14 Figure-15 Figure-16 Figure-17 Figure-18 Figure-19 Figure-20 Figure-21 Figure-22 Figure-23 Figure-24 Figure-25 Figure-26 Figure-27 Figure-28 Figure-29 Figure-30 Figure-31 Figure-32 Figure-33 Figure-34 Figure-35 Figure-36 Figure-37 Figure-38 Figure-39 Figure-40 Figure-41 Figure-42 Figure-43 Figure-44 Figure-45 Figure-46 Figure-47 Figure-48 Functional Block Diagram ............................................................................................................................................................................ 12 416-Pin PBGA (Top View) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 13 Switch between Impedance Matching Modes .............................................................................................................................................. 24 Receive Differential Line Interface with Twisted Pair Cable (with transformer) ........................................................................................... 25 Receive Differential Line Interface with Coaxial Cable (with transformer) ................................................................................................... 25 Receive Differential Line Interface with Twisted Pair Cable (transformer-less, non standard compliant) .................................................... 26 Receive Single Ended Line Interface with Coaxial Cable (with transformer) ............................................................................................... 26 Receive Single Ended Line Interface with Coaxial Cable (transformer-less, non standard compliant) ....................................................... 26 Receive Path Monitoring .............................................................................................................................................................................. 27 Transmit Path Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................................ 27 DSX-1 Waveform Template ........................................................................................................................................................................ 30 T1 Waveform Template Measurement Circuit ............................................................................................................................................. 30 E1 Waveform Template ............................................................................................................................................................................... 31 E1 Waveform Template Measurement Circuit ............................................................................................................................................ 31 Transmit Differential Line Interface with Twisted Pair Cable (with Transformer) ........................................................................................ 35 Transmit Differential Line Interface with Coaxial Cable (with transformer) ................................................................................................. 35 Transmit Differential Line Interface with Twisted Pair Cable (transformer-less, non standard compliant) .................................................. 35 Transmit Single Ended Line Interface with Coaxial Cable (with transformer) ............................................................................................. 35 Jitter Attenuator ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 37 LLOS Indication on Pins .............................................................................................................................................................................. 39 TLOS Detection Between Two Channels .................................................................................................................................................... 41 Pattern Generation (1) ................................................................................................................................................................................. 43 Pattern Generation (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................. 43 PRBS / ARB Detection ................................................................................................................................................................................ 44 IB Detection ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 45 Automatic Error Counter Updating .............................................................................................................................................................. 46 Manual Error Counter Updating .................................................................................................................................................................. 46 Priority Of Diagnostic Facilities During Analog Loopback ........................................................................................................................... 49 Priority Of Diagnostic Facilities During Manual Remote Loopback ............................................................................................................. 50 Priority Of Diagnostic Facilities During Digital Loopback ............................................................................................................................ 51 Priority Of Diagnostic Facilities During Manual Remote Loopback + Manual Digital Loopback ................................................................. 53 Priority Of Diagnostic Facilities During Manual Remote Loopback + Automatic Digital Loopback ............................................................. 53 G.772 Monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 54 Automatic JM Updating ............................................................................................................................................................................... 55 Manual JM Updating ................................................................................................................................................................................... 55 REFA Output Options in Normal Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 58 REFB Output Options in Normal Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 59 REFA Output in LLOS Condition (When RCLKn Is Selected) ..................................................................................................................... 59 REFA Output in No CLKA Condition (When CLKA Is Selected) ................................................................................................................. 60 Interrupt Service Process ............................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Reset ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 64 1+1 HPS Scheme, Differential Interface (Shared Common Transformer) .................................................................................................. 66 1:1 HPS Scheme, Differential Interface (Individual Transformer) ............................................................................................................... 67 1+1 HPS Scheme, E1 75 ohm Single-Ended Interface (Shared Common Transformer) ........................................................................... 68 JTAG Architecture ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 113 JTAG State Diagram ................................................................................................................................................................................. 114 Transmit Clock Timing Diagram ................................................................................................................................................................ 126 Receive Clock Timing Diagram ................................................................................................................................................................. 126 List of Figures 8 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 Figure-49 Figure-50 Figure-51 Figure-52 Figure-53 Figure-54 Figure-55 Figure-56 Figure-57 Figure-58 Figure-59 Figure-60 Figure-61 Figure-62 Figure-63 Figure-64 Figure-65 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT CLKE1 Clock Timing Diagram ................................................................................................................................................................... E1 Jitter Tolerance Performance ............................................................................................................................................................... T1/J1 Jitter Tolerance Performance .......................................................................................................................................................... E1 Jitter Transfer Performance ................................................................................................................................................................. T1/J1 Jitter Transfer Performance ............................................................................................................................................................. Read Operation in Serial Microprocessor Interface .................................................................................................................................. Write Operation in Serial Microprocessor Interface ................................................................................................................................... Timing Diagram ......................................................................................................................................................................................... Parallel Motorola Non-Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Read Cycle ................................................................................................ Parallel Motorola Non-Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Write Cycle ................................................................................................ Parallel Intel Non-Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Read Cycle ....................................................................................................... Parallel Intel Non-Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Write Cycle ........................................................................................................ Parallel Motorola Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Read Cycle ........................................................................................................ Parallel Motorola Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Write Cycle ........................................................................................................ Parallel Intel Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Read Cycle ............................................................................................................... Parallel Intel Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Write Cycle ............................................................................................................... JTAG Timing ............................................................................................................................................................................................. List of Figures 9 127 129 129 130 130 131 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 February 6, 2009 16(+1) Channel High-Density T1/E1/J1 Line Interface Unit IDT82P2816 FEATURES Integrates 16+1 channels T1/E1/J1 short haul line interface units for 100 Ω T1, 120 Ω E1, 110 Ω J1 twisted pair cable and 75 Ω E1 coaxial cable applications ‹ Per-channel configurable Line Interface options • Supports various line interface options – Differential and Single Ended line interfaces – true Single Ended termination on primary and secondary side of trans- ‹ – transformer-less for Differential interfaces • Fully integrated and software selectable receive and transmit termination – Option 1: Fully Internal Impedance Matching with integrated receive ‹ ‹ former for E1 75 Ω coaxial cable applications termination resistor – Option 2: Partially Internal Impedance Matching with common external resistor for improved device power dissipation – Option 3: External impedance Matching termination • Supports global configuration and per-channel configuration to T1, E1 or J1 mode ‹ Per-channel programmable features • Provides T1/E1/J1 short haul waveform templates and userprogrammable arbitrary waveform templates • Provides two JAs (Jitter Attenuator) for each channel of receiver and transmitter • Supports AMI/B8ZS (for T1/J1) and AMI/HDB3 (for E1) encoding and decoding ‹ Per-channel System Interface options • Supports Single Rail, Dual Rail with clock or without clock and sliced system interface • Integrated Clock Recovery for the transmit interface to recover transmit clock from system transmit data ‹ Per-channel system and diagnostic functions • Provides transmit driver over-current detection and protection with optional automatic high impedance of transmit interface • Detects and generates PRBS (Pseudo Random Bit Sequence), ARB (Arbitrary Pattern) and IB (Inband Loopback) in either receive or transmit direction • Provides defect and alarm detection in both receive and transmit directions. – Defects include BPV (Bipolar Violation) /CV (Code Violation) and EXZ ‹ ‹ ‹ (Excessive Zeroes) ‹ – Alarms include LLOS (Line LOS), SLOS (System LOS), TLOS (Transmit LOS) and AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) • Programmable LLOS detection /clear levels. Compliant with ITU and ANSI specifications • Various pattern, defect and alarm reporting options – Serial hardware LLOS reporting (LLOS, LLOS0) for all 17 channels – Configurable per-channel hardware reporting with RMF/TMF (Receive /Transmit Multiplex Function) – Register access to individual registers or 16-bit error counters • Supports Analog Loopback, Digital Loopback and Remote Loopback • Supports T1.102 line monitor Channel 0 monitoring options • Channel 0 can be configured as monitoring channel or regular channel to increase capacity • Supports all internal G.772 Monitoring for Non-Intrusive Monitoring of any of the 16 channels of receiver or transmitter • Jitter Measurement per ITU O.171 Hitless Protection Switching (HPS) without external Relays • Supports 1+1 and 1:1 hitless protection switching • Asynchronous hardware control (OE, RIM) for fast global high impedance of receiver and transmitter (hot switching between working and backup board) • High impedance transmitter and receiver while powered down • Per-channel register control for high impedance, independent for receiver and transmitter Clock Inputs and Outputs • Flexible master clock (N x 1.544 MHz or N x 2.048 MHz) (1 ≤ N ≤ 8, N is an integer number) • Two selectable reference clock outputs – from the recovered clock of any of the 17 channels – from external clock input – from device master clock • Integrated clock synthesizer can multiply or divide the reference clock to a wide range of frequencies: 8 KHz, 64 KHz, 2.048 MHz, 4.096 MHz, 8.192 MHz, 19.44 MHz and 32.768 MHz • Cascading is provided to select a single reference clock from multiple devices without the need for any external logic Microprocessor Interface • Supports Serial microprocessor interface and Parallel Intel / Motorola Non-Multiplexed /Multiplexed microprocessor interface Other Key Features • IEEE1149.1 JTAG boundary scan • Two general purpose I/O pins • 3.3 V I/O with 5 V tolerant inputs • 3.3 V and 1.8 V power supply • Package: 416-pin PBGA (27 mm X 27 mm) Applicable Standards • AT&T Pub 62411 Accunet T1.5 Service • ANSI T1.102, T1.403 and T1.231 • Bellcore TR-TSY-000009, GR-253-CORE and GR-499-CORE • ETSI CTR12/13 • ETS 300166 and ETS 300 233 • G.703, G.735, G.736, G.742, G.772, G.775, G.783 and G.823 • O.161 • ITU I.431 and ITU O.171 IDT and the IDT logo are trademarks of Integrated Device Technology, Inc. 10  2009 Integrated Device Technology, Inc. February 6, 2009 DSC-6250/3 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT APPLICATIONS DESCRIPTION In the transmit path, the data to be transmitted is input on TDn in Single Rail NRZ Format mode or TDPn/TDNn in Dual Rail NRZ Format mode and Dual Rail RZ Format mode, and is sampled by a transmit reference clock. The clock can be supplied externally from TCLKn or recovered from the input transmit data by an internal Clock Recovery. A selectable JA in Tx path is used to de-jitter gapped clocks. To meet T1/ E1/J1 waveform standards, five preset T1 templates and two E1 templates, as well as an arbitrary waveform generator are provided. The data through the Waveform Shaper, the Line Driver and the Tx Transmitter is output on TTIPn and TRINGn. The IDT82P2816 is a 16+1 channels high-density T1/E1/J1 short haul Line Interface Unit. Each channel of the IDT82P2816 can be independently configured. The configuration is performed through a Serial or Parallel Intel/Motorola Non-Multiplexed /Multiplexed microprocessor interface. Alarms (including LOS, AIS) and defects (including BPV, EXZ) are detected in both receive line side and transmit system side. AIS alarm, PRBS, ARB and IB patterns can be generated /detected in receive / transmit direction for testing purpose. Analog Loopback, Digital Loopback and Remote Loopback are all integrated for diagnostics. In the receive path, through a Single Ended or Differential line interface, the received signal is processed by an adaptive Equalizer and then sent to a Slicer. Clock and data are recovered from the digital pulses output from the Slicer. After passing through an enabled or disabled Receive Jitter Attenuator, the recovered data is decoded using B8ZS/ AMI/HDB3 line code rule in Single Rail NRZ Format mode and output to the system, or output to the system without decoding in Dual Rail NRZ Format mode and Dual Rail RZ Format mode. Channel 0 is a special channel. Besides normal operation as the other 16 channels, channel 0 also supports G.772 Monitoring and Jitter Measurement per ITU O.171. ‹ ‹ ‹ ‹ ‹ SDH/SONET multiplexers Central office or PBX (Private Branch Exchange) Digital access cross connects Remote wireless modules Microwave transmission systems Applications A line monitor function per T1.102 is available to provide a Non-Intrusive Monitoring of channels of other devices. JTAG per IEEE 1149.1 is also supported by the IDT82P2816. 11 February 6, 2009 Block Diagram TRING[16:0] TTIP[16:0] RRING[16:0] RTIP[16:0] 12 Waveform Shaper Line Driver Defect/Alarm Detector Tx Clock Recovery JTAG RCLK[16:0] Encoder Pattern Generator/ Detector Decoder Clock Generator TJA RJA Digital Loopback Remote Loopback Rx Clock & Data Recovery CLKB CLKA REFB REFA CLKE1 CLKT1 MCKSEL[3:0] MCLK MCU Interface Alarm Generator Slicer Amplifier TDO TDI TCK TMS TRST A[10:0] D[7:0] SDO/ACK /READY SDI/R/ W/ WR SCLK/ DS/RD ALE/AS IM INT/ MOT P/S CS INT Common Control G.772 Monitor Tx Terminator Analog Loopback Rx Terminator Defect/Alarm Detector VDDIO VDDA VDDD VDDR VDDT GNDA GNDD GNDT TCLK[16:0]/TDN[16:0] TDN[16:0]/TMF[16:0] TD[16:0]/TDP[16:0] RCLK[16:0]/RMF[16:0] RDN[16:0]/RMF[16:0] RD[16:0]/RDP[16:0] LLOS LLOS0 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT BLOCK DIAGRAM RST GPIO[1:0] TEHW TEHWE OE RIM REF VCOM[1:0] VCOMEN Figure-1 Functional Block Diagram February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 1 PIN ASSIGNMENT 1 A B C 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT GNDA GNDA VDDA 2 GNDA GNDA VDDA 3 TTIP14 GNDT RTIP14 4 TRING 14 GNDT RRING 14 5 TTIP13 VDDT 14 6 TRING 13 VDDT 13 VDDR 14 VDDR 13 RTIP13 RRING 13 7 8 9 10 RCLK TCLK16 VDDIO 16 /TDN16 /RMF16 VDDIO VDDIO 11 RCLK RD15/ 15 RDP15 /RMF15 12 RD14/ RDP14 13 TD13/ TDP13 14 RD16/ RDP16 TDN15/ TMF15 VDDIO TD15/ TDP15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 TD10/ TDP10 RD10/ RDP10 TDN9/ TMF9 RDN9/ RMF9 REF TRING 12 TTIP12 GNDA GNDA A RCLK RDN12/ TDN11/ TCLK10 11 RMF12 TMF11 /TDN10 /RMF11 TD9/ TDP9 RD9/ RDP9 RCLK9/ RMF9 VDDT 12 VDDT 11 GNDA GNDA B NC RRING 12 RTIP12 VDDA VDDA C VDDIO VDDR 12 VDDR 11 VDDA VDDA D RCLK RDN13/ TDN12/ TCLK11 12 RMF13 TMF12 /TDN11 /RMF12 RCLK TDN16/ RDN16/ TCLK15 RDN15/ TCLK14 RD13/ 14 TMF16 RMF16 /TDN15 RMF15 /TDN14 RDP13 /RMF14 TD16/ TDP16 15 TD12/ TDP12 VDDD RCLK TDN14/ RDN14/ TCLK13 RD12/ 13 TMF14 RMF14 /TDN13 RDP12 /RMF13 VDDD TD14/ TDP14 TDN13/ TMF13 TCLK12 /TDN12 TD11/ TDP11 RCLK RDN11/ TDN10/ TCLK9/ 10 RMF11 TMF10 TDN9 /RMF10 VDDD RD11/ RDP11 RDN10/ RMF10 D VDDA VDDA GNDT GNDA E TRING 15 VDDT 15 VDDR 15 RRING 15 GNDA RRING 11 GNDT TRING 11 E F TTIP15 VDDT 16 VDDR 16 RTIP15 GNDA RTIP11 GNDT TTIP11 F G TRING 16 GNDT RRING 16 GNDA RRING 10 VDDR 10 VDDT 10 TRING 10 G H TTIP16 GNDT RTIP16 GNDA RTIP10 VDDR9 VDDT9 TTIP10 H J TRING 0 VDDT0 VDDR0 RRING 0 GNDA RRING 9 GNDT TRING 9 J K TTIP0 VDDT1 VDDR1 RTIP0 GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDA RTIP9 GNDT TTIP9 K L TRING 1 GNDT RRING 1 GNDA GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD RRING 8 VDDR8 VDDT8 TRING 8 L M TTIP1 GNDT RTIP1 GNDA GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD RTIP8 VDDR7 VDDT7 TTIP8 M N TRING 2 VDDT2 VDDR2 RRING 2 GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDA RRING 7 GNDT TRING 7 N P TTIP2 VDDT3 VDDR3 RTIP2 GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDA RTIP7 GNDT TTIP7 P R TRING 3 GNDT RRING 3 GNDA GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD RRING 6 VDDR6 VDDT6 TRING 6 R T TTIP3 GNDT RTIP3 GNDA GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD RTIP6 VDDR5 VDDT5 TTIP6 T U TRING 4 VDDT4 VDDR4 RRING 4 GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDA RRING 5 GNDT TRING 5 U V TTIP4 GNDA GNDA RTIP4 GNDA RTIP5 GNDT TTIP5 V W VDDA VDDA VCOM0 VCOM EN VDDIO VCOM1 VDDA VDDA W Y TD1/ TDP1 TDN1/ TMF1 TCLK1/ TDN1 RD1/ RDP1 RCLK8/ RMF8 RDN8/ RMF8 RD8/ RDP8 TCLK8/ TDN8 Y AA RDN1/ RMF1 RCLK1/ RMF1 TD2/ TDP2 VDDIO VDDIO TDN8/ TMF8 TD8/ TDP8 RCLK7/ RMF7 AA AB TDN2/ TMF2 TCLK2/ TDN2 RD2/ RDP2 RDN2/ RMF2 RDN7/ RMF7 RD7/ RDP7 TCLK7/ TDN7 TDN7/ TMF7 AB AC RCLK2/ RMF2 TD3/ TDP3 TDN3/ TMF3 VDDIO VDDD TD7/ TDP7 RCLK6/ RMF6 RDN6/ RMF6 AC AD TCLK3/ TDN3 RD3/ RDP3 TD4/ TDP4 RD4/ RDP4 VDDIO VDDIO VDDD VDDD VDDIO VDDIO VDDD RDN0/ RMF0 VDDD GPIO1 VDDD TEHW VDDIO D1 VDDIO A5 VDDIO P/S IM VDDD LLOS0 VDDD CLKT1 MCK SEL3 TD0/ TDP0 RD0/ RDP0 TMS TDO GPIO0 TEHWE D5 D2 A9 A6 A2 INT/ MOT ALE/AS CS LLOS CLKE1 MCK SEL1 MCK SEL2 RDN5/ RMF5 RD6/ RDP6 TCLK6/ TDN6 TDN6/ TMF6 AD SCLK/ DS/RD REFA CLKA MCK SEL0 TDN5/ TMF5 RD5/ RDP5 TD6/ TDP6 GNDA GNDA AE INT REFB CLKB MCLK TD5/ TDP5 TCLK5/ RCLK5/ TDN5 RMF5 GNDA GNDA AF 18 19 20 21 22 25 26 AE GNDA GNDA RCLK3/ TCLK4/ RCLK4/ TCLK0/ RMF3 TDN4 RMF4 TDN0 AF GNDA GNDA RDN3/ RMF3 TDN4/ TMF4 RDN4/ RMF4 1 2 3 4 5 TRST TCK RIM IC D6 D3 A10 A7 A3 A0 TDN0/ TMF0 RCLK0/ RMF0 TDI OE RST D7 D4 D0 A8 A4 A1 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SDO/ ACK/ RDY SDI/ R/W/ WR 17 23 24 Figure-2 416-Pin PBGA (Top View) Pin Assignment 13 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 2 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT PIN DESCRIPTION Name I/O Pin No. 1 Description Line Interface RTIPn Input K4, M3, P4, T3, V4, V24, T23, P24, RTIPn / RRINGn: Receive Bipolar Tip/Ring for Channel 0 ~ 16 M23, K24, H23, F24, C24, D5, C3, The receive line interface supports both Receive Differential mode and Receive Single Ended F4, H3 mode. In Receive Differential mode, the received signal is coupled into RTIPn and RRINGn via a 1:1 J4, L3, N4, R3, U4, U24, R23, N24, transformer or without a transformer (transformer-less). L23, J24, G23, E24, C23, D6, C4, In Receive Single Ended mode, RRINGn should be left open. The received signal is input on E4, G3 RTIPn via a 2:1 (step down) transformer or without a transformer (transformer-less). These pins will become High-Z globally or channel specific in the following conditions: • Global High-Z: - Connecting the RIM pin to low; - Loss of MCLK - During and after power-on reset, hardware reset or global software reset; • Per-channel High-Z - Receiver power down by writing ‘1’ to the R_OFF bit (b5, RCF0,...) Output K1, M1, P1, T1, V1, V26, T26, P26, TTIPn / TRINGn: Transmit Bipolar Tip /Ring for Channel 0 ~ 16 M26, K26, H26, F26, A24, A5, A3, The transmit line interface supports both Transmit Differential mode and Transmit Single F1, H1 Ended mode. In Transmit Differential mode, TTIPn outputs a positive differential pulse while TRINGn outJ1, L1, N1, R1, U1, U26, R26, N26, puts a negative differential pulse. The pulses are coupled to the line side via a 1:2 (step up) L26, J26, G26, E26, A23, A6, A4, transformer or without a transformer (transformer-less). E1, G1 In Transmit Single Ended mode, TRINGn should be left open (it is shorted to ground internally). The signal presented at TTIPn is output to the line side via a 1:2 (step up) transformer. These pins will become High-Z globally or channel specific in the following conditions: • Global High-Z: - Connecting the OE pin to low; - Loss of MCLK; - During and after power-on reset, hardware reset or global software reset; • Per-channel High-Z - Writing ‘0’ to the OE bit (b6, TCF0,...) 2; - Loss of TCLKn in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode or Transmit Dual Rail NRZ Format mode, except that the channel is in Remote Loopback or transmit internal pattern with XCLK 3; - Transmitter power down by writing ‘1’ to the T_OFF bit (b5, TCF0,...); - Per-channel software reset; - The THZ_OC bit (b4, TCF0,...) is set to ‘1’ and the transmit driver over-current is detected. Refer to Section 3.3.8 Output High-Z on TTIP and TRING for details. RRINGn (n=0~16) TTIPn TRINGn (n=0~16) Note: 1. The pin number of the pins with the footnote ‘n’ is listed in order of channel (CH0 ~ CH16). 2. The content in the brackets indicates the position and the register name of the preceding bit. After the register name, if the punctuation ‘,...’ is followed, this bit is in a per-channel register. If there is no punctuation following the address, this bit is in a global register or in a channel 0 only register. The addresses and details are included in Chapter 5 Programming Information. 3. XCLK is derived from MCLK. It is 1.544 MHz in T1/J1 mode or 2.048 MHz in E1 mode. Pin Description 14 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 Name 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT I/O Pin No. Description System Interface RDn / RDPn Output (n=0~16) AD6, Y4, AB3, AD2, AD4, AE23, RDn: Receive Data for Channel 0 ~ 16 AD24, AB24, Y25, B21, A19, D18, When the receive system interface is configured to Single Rail NRZ Format mode, this multiC16, B14, A12, A10, C9 plex pin is used as RDn. The decoded NRZ data is updated on the active edge of RCLKn. The active level on RDn is selected by the RD_INV bit (b3, RCF1,...). When the receiver is powered down, RDn will be in High-Z state or low, as selected by the RHZ bit (b6, RCF0,...). RDPn: Positive Receive Data for Channel 0 ~ 16 When the receive system interface is configured to Dual Rail NRZ Format mode, Dual Rail RZ Format mode or Dual Rail Sliced mode, this multiplex pin is used as RDPn. In Receive Dual Rail NRZ Format mode, the un-decoded NRZ data is output on RDPn and RDNn and updated on the active edge of RCLKn. In Receive Dual Rail RZ Format mode, the un-decoded RZ data is output on RDPn and RDNn and updated on the active edge of RCLKn. In Receive Dual Rail Sliced mode, the raw RZ sliced data is output on RDPn and RDNn. For Receive Differential line interface, an active level on RDPn indicates the receipt of a positive pulse on RTIPn and a negative pulse on RRINGn; while an active level on RDNn indicates the receipt of a negative pulse on RTIPn and a positive pulse on RRINGn. For Receive Single Ended line interface, an active level on RDPn indicates the receipt of a positive pulse on RTIPn; while an active level on RDNn indicates the receipt of a negative pulse on RTIPn. The active level on RDPn and RDNn is selected by the RD_INV bit (b3, RCF1,...). When the receiver is powered down, RDPn and RDNn will be in High-Z state or low, as selected by the RHZ bit (b6, RCF0,...). RDNn / RMFn (n=0~16) Output AC6, AA1, AB4, AF3, AF5, AD23, RDNn: Negative Receive Data for Channel 0 ~ 16 AC26, AB23, Y24, A21, D20, C18, When the receive system interface is configured to Dual Rail NRZ Format mode, Dual Rail RZ B16, A14, C13, B11, B9 Format mode or Dual Rail Sliced mode, this multiplex pin is used as RDNn. (Refer to the description of RDPn for details). RMFn: Receive Multiplex Function for Channel 0 ~ 16 When the receive system interface is configured to Single Rail NRZ Format mode, this multiplex pin is used as RMFn. RMFn is configured by the RMF_DEF[2:0] bits (b7~5, RCF1,...) and can indicate PRBS/ARB, LAIS, LEXZ, LBPV, LEXZ+LBPV, LLOS, output recovered clock (RCLK) or XOR output of positive and negative sliced data. Refer to Section 3.5.7.1 RMFn Indication for details. The output on RMFn is updated on the active edge of RCLKn. The active level of RMFn is always high. When the receiver is powered down, RMFn will be in High-Z state or low, as selected by the RHZ bit (b6, RCF0,...). Pin Description 15 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Name I/O RCLKn / RMFn Output (n=0~16) Pin No. Description AF7, AA2, AC1, AE3, AE5, AF24, RCLKn: Receive Clock for Channel 0 ~ 16 AC25, AA26, Y23, B22, C20, B18, When the receive system interface is configured to Single Rail NRZ Format mode, Dual Rail A16, C15, B13, A11, A9 NRZ Format mode or Dual Rail RZ Format mode, this multiplex pin is used as RCLKn. RCLKn outputs a 1.544 MHz (in T1/J1 mode) or 2.048 MHz (in E1 mode) clock which is recovered from the received signal. The data output on RDn and RMFn (in Receive Single Rail NRZ Format mode) or RDPn/ RDNn (in Receive Dual Rail NRZ Format mode, Receive Dual Rail RZ Format mode and Receive Dual Rail Sliced) is updated on the active edge of RCLKn. The active edge is selected by the RCK_ES bit (b4, RCF1,...). In LLOS condition, RCLKn output high or XCLK, as selected by the RCKH bit (b7, RCF0,...) (refer to Section 3.5.3.1 Line LOS (LLOS) for details). When the receiver is powered down, RCLKn will be in High-Z state or low, as selected by the RHZ bit (b6, RCF0,...). RMFn: Receive Multiplex Function for Channel 0 ~ 16 When the receive system interface is configured to Dual Rail Sliced mode, this multiplex pin is used as RMFn. (Refer to the description of RMFn of the RDNn/RMFn multiplex pin for details). LLOS Output AD19 LLOS: Receive Line Loss Of Signal LLOS synchronizes with the output of CLKE1 and can indicate the LLOS (Line LOS) status of all 17 channels in a serial format. When the clock output on CLKE1 is enabled, LLOS indicates the LLOS status of the 17 channels in a serial format and repeats every seventeen cycles. Channel 0 is positioned by LLOS0. Refer to the description of LLOS0 below for details. LLOS is updated on the rising edge of CLKE1 and is always active high. When the clock output of CLKE1 is disabled, LLOS will be held in High-Z state. (Refer to Section 3.5.3.1 Line LOS (LLOS) for details.) LLOS0 Output AC19 LLOS0: Receive Line Loss Of Signal for Channel 0 LLOS0 can indicate the position of channel 0 on the LLOS pin. When the clock output on CLKE1 is enabled, LLOS0 pulses high for one CLKE1 clock cycle to indicate the position of channel 0 on the LLOS pin. When CLKE1 outputs 8 KHz clock, LLOS0 pulses high for one 8 KHz clock cycle (125 µs) every seventeen 8 KHz clock cycles; when CLKE1 outputs 2.048 MHz clock, LLOS0 pulses high for one 2.048 MHz clock cycle (488 ns) every seventeen 2.048 MHz clock cycles. LLOS0 is updated on the rising edge of CLKE1. When the clock output on CLKE1 is disabled, LLOS0 will be held in High-Z state. (Refer to Section 3.5.3.1 Line LOS (LLOS) for details.) Pin Description 16 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Name I/O TDn / TDPn Input (n=0~16) Pin No. Description AD5, Y1, AA3, AC2, AD3, AF22, TDn: Transmit Data for Channel 0 ~ 16 AE24, AC24, AA25, B20, A18, C17, When the transmit system interface is configured to Single Rail NRZ Format mode, this multiB15, A13, D12, D10, C8 plex pin is used as TDn. TDn accepts Single Rail NRZ data. The data is sampled into the device on the active edge of TCLKn. The active level on TDn is selected by the TD_INV bit (b3, TCF1,...). TDPn: Positive Transmit Data for Channel 0 ~ 16 When the transmit system interface is configured to Dual Rail NRZ Format mode or Dual Rail RZ Format mode, this multiplex pin is used as TDPn. In Transmit Dual Rail NRZ Format mode, the pre-encoded NRZ data is input on TDPn and TDNn and sampled on the active edge of TCLKn. In Transmit Dual Rail RZ Format mode, the pre-encoded RZ data is input on TDPn and TDNn. The line code is as follows (when the TD_INV bit (b3, TCF1,...) is ‘0’): TDPn TDNn Output Pulse on TTIPn Output Pulse on TRINGn * 0 0 Space Space 0 1 Negative Pulse Positive Pulse 1 0 Positive Pulse Negative Pulse 1 1 Space Space Note: * For Transmit Single Ended line interface, TRINGn should be open. The active level on TDPn and TDNn is selected by the TD_INV bit (b3, TCF1,...). TDNn / TMFn Input / Output (n=0~16) AF6, Y2, AB1, AC3, AF4, AE22, TDNn: Negative Transmit Data for Channel 0 ~ 16 AD26, AB26, AA24, A20, C19, B17, When the transmit system interface is configured to Dual Rail NRZ Format mode, this multiA15, D14, C12, C10, B8 plex pin is used as TDNn. (Refer to the description of TDPn for details). TMFn: Transmit Multiplex Function for Channel 0 ~ 16 When the transmit system interface is configured to Single Rail NRZ Format mode or Dual Rail RZ Format mode, this multiplex pin is used as TMFn. TMFn is configured by the TMF_DEF[2:0] bits (b7~5, TCF1,...) and can indicate PRBS/ARB, SAIS, TOC, TLOS, SEXZ, SBPV, SEXZ+SBPV, SLOS. Refer to Section 3.5.7.2 TMFn Indication for details. The output on TMFn is updated on the active edge of TCLKn (if available). The active level of TMFn is always high. TCLKn / TDNn (n=0~16) Input AE6, Y3, AB2, AD1, AE4, AF23, TCLKn: Transmit Clock for Channel 0 ~ 16 AD25, AB25, Y26, C21, B19, A17, When the transmit system interface is configured to Single Rail NRZ Format mode or Dual D16, C14, B12, B10, A8 Rail NRZ Format mode, this multiplex pin is used as TCLKn. TCLKn inputs a 1.544 MHz (in T1/J1 mode) or 2.048 MHz (in E1 mode) clock. The data input on TDn (in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode) or TDPn/TDNn (in Transmit Dual Rail NRZ Format mode) is sampled on the active edge of TCLKn. The data output on TMFn (in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode) is updated on the active edge of TCLKn. The active edge is selected by the TCK_ES bit (b4, TCF1,...). TDNn: Negative Transmit Data for Channel 0 ~ 16 When the transmit system interface is configured to Dual Rail RZ Format mode, this multiplex pin is used as TDNn. (Refer to the description of TDPn for details). Pin Description 17 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 Name 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT I/O Pin No. Description Clock MCLK Input AF21 MCLK: Master Clock Input MCLK provides a stable reference timing for the IDT82P2816. MCLK should be a clock with +/ -32 ppm (in T1/J1 mode) or +/-50 ppm (in E1 mode) accuracy. The clock frequency of MCLK is informed to the device by MCKSEL[3:0]. If MCLK misses (duty cycle is less than 30% for 10 µs) and then recovers, the device will be reset automatically. MCKSEL[0] Input AE21 MCKSEL[3:0]: Master Clock Selection These four pins inform the device of the clock frequency input on MCLK: MCKSEL[1] AD21 MCKSEL[2] AD22 MCKSEL[3] AC22 MCKSEL[3:0]* Frequency (MHz) 0000 1.544 0001 1.544 X 2 0010 1.544 X 3 0011 1.544 X 4 0100 1.544 X 5 0101 1.544 X 6 0110 1.544 X 7 0111 1.544 X 8 1000 2.048 1001 2.048 X 2 1010 2.048 X 3 1011 2.048 X 4 1100 2.048 X 5 1101 2.048 X 6 1110 2.048 X 7 1111 2.048 X 8 Note: 0: GNDD 1: VDDIO CLKT1 Output AC21 CLKT1: 8 KHz / T1 Clock Output The output on CLKT1 can be enabled or disabled, as determined by the CLKT1_EN bit (b1, CLKG). When the output is enabled, CLKT1 outputs an 8 KHz or 1.544 MHz clock, as selected by the CLKT1 bit (b0, CLKG). The output is locked to MCLK. When the output is disabled, CLKT1 is in High-Z state. CLKE1 Output AD20 CLKE1: 8 KHz / E1 Clock Output The output on CLKE1 can be enabled or disabled, as determined by the CLKE1_EN bit (b3, CLKG). When the output is enabled, CLKE1 outputs an 8 KHz or 2.048 MHz clock, as selected by the CLKE1 bit (b2, CLKG). The output is locked to MCLK. When the output is disabled, CLKE1 is in High-Z state. Pin Description 18 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Name I/O Pin No. Description REFA Output AE19 REFA: Reference Clock Output A REFA can output three kinds of clocks: a recovered clock of one of the 17 channels, an external clock input on CLKA or a free running clock. The clock frequency is programmable. Refer to Section 3.6.2 Clock Outputs on REFA/REFB for details. The output on REFA can also be disabled, as determined by the REFA_EN bit (b6, REFA). When the output is disabled, REFA is in High-Z state. REFB Output AF19 REFB: Reference Clock Output B REFB can output a recovered clock of one of the 17 channels, an external clock input on CLKB or a free running clock. Refer to Section 3.6.2 Clock Outputs on REFA/REFB for details. The output on REFB can also be disabled, as determined by the REFB_EN bit (b6, REFB). When the output is disabled, REFB is in High-Z state. CLKA Input AE20 CLKA: External T1/E1 Clock Input A External T1/J1 (1.544 MHz) or E1 (2.048 MHz) clock is input on this pin. The CKA_T1E1 bit (b5, REFA) should be set to match the clock frequency. When not used, this pin should be connected to GNDD. CLKB Input AF20 CLKB: External T1/E1 Clock Input B External T1/J1 (1.544 MHz) or E1 (2.048 MHz) clock is input on this pin. The CKB_T1E1 bit (b5, REFB) should be set to match the clock frequency. When not used, this pin should be connected to GNDD. Common Control VCOM[0] Output VCOM[1] W3 W24 VCOM: Voltage Common Mode [1:0] These pins are used only when the receive line interface is in Receive Differential mode and connected without a transformer (transformer-less). To enable these pins, the VCOMEN pin must be connected high. Refer to Figure-6 for the connection. When these pins are not used, they should be left open. VCOMEN Input (Pull-Down) W4 VCOMEN: Voltage Common Mode Enable This pin should be connected high only when the receive line interface is in Receive Differential mode and connected without a transformer (transformer-less). When not used, this pin should be left open. REF - A22 REF: Reference Resistor An external resistor (10 KΩ, ±1%) is used to connect this pin to ground to provide a standard reference current for internal circuit. This resistor is required to ensure correct device operation. RIM Input (Pull-Down) AE9 RIM: Receive Impedance Matching In Receive Differential mode, when RIM is low, all 17 receivers become High-Z and only external impedance matching is supported. In this case, the per-channel impedance matching configuration bits - the R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) and the R120IN bit (b4, RCF0,...) - are ignored. In Receive Differential mode, when RIM is high, impedance matching is configured on a perchannel basis by the R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) and the R120IN bit (b4, RCF0,...). This pin can be used to control the receive impedance state for Hitless Protection applications. Refer to Section 4.4 Hitless Protection Switching (HPS) Summary for details. In Receive Single Ended mode, this pin should be left open. Pin Description 19 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Name I/O Pin No. Description OE Input AF9 OE: Output Enable OE enables or disables all Line Drivers globally. A high level on this pin enables all Line Drivers while a low level on this pin places all Line Drivers in High-Z state and independent from related register settings. Note that the functionality of the internal circuit is not affected by OE. If this pin is not used, it should be tied to VDDIO. This pin can be used to control the transmit impedance state for Hitless protection applications. Refer to Section 4.4 Hitless Protection Switching (HPS) Summary for details. TEHWE Input (Pull-Up) AD10 TEHWE: Hardware T1/J1 or E1 Mode Selection Enable When this pin is open, the T1/J1 or E1 operation mode is selected by TEHW globally. When this pin is low, the T1/J1 or E1 operation mode is selected by the T1E1 bit (b0, CHCF,...) on a per-channel basis. TEHW Input (Pull-Up) AC10 TEHW: Hardware T1/J1 or E1 Mode Selection When TEHWE is open, this pin selects the T1/J1 or E1 operation mode globally: Low - E1 mode; Open - T1/J1 mode. When TEHWE is low, the input on this pin is ignored. GPIO[0] Output / Input AD9 GPIO: General Purpose I/O [1:0] These two pins can be defined as input pins or output pins by the DIR[1:0] bits (b1~0, GPIO) respectively. When the pins are input, their polarities are indicated by the LEVEL[1:0] bits (b3~2, GPIO) respectively. When the pins are output, their polarities are controlled by the LEVEL[1:0] bits (b3~2, GPIO) respectively. GPIO[1] RST AC8 Input AF10 RST: Reset (Active Low) A low pulse on this pin resets the device. This hardware reset process completes in 2 µs maximum. Refer to Section 4.1 Reset for an overview on reset options. MCU Interface INT Output AF18 INT: Interrupt Request This pin indicates interrupt requests for all unmasked interrupt sources. The output characteristics (open drain or push-pull internally) and the active level are determined by the INT_PIN[1:0] bits (b3~2, GCF). CS Input AD18 CS: Chip Select (Active Low) This pin must be asserted low to enable the microprocessor interface. A transition from high to low must occur on this pin for each Read/Write operation and CS should remain low until the operation is over. P/S Input AC16 P/S: Parallel or Serial Microprocessor Interface Select P/S selects Serial or Parallel microprocessor interface for the device: GNDD - Serial microprocessor interface. VDDIO - Parallel microprocessor interface. Serial microprocessor interface consists of the CS, SCLK, SDI, SDO pins. Parallel microprocessor interface consists of the CS, INT/MOT, IM, DS/RD, ALE/AS, R/W/WR, ACK/RDY, D[7:0], A[10:0] pins. INT/MOT Input (Pull-Up) AD16 INT/MOT: Intel or Motorola Microprocessor Interface Select In Parallel microprocessor interface, INT/MOT selects Intel or Motorola microprocessor interface for the device: GNDD - Parallel Motorola microprocessor interface. Open - Parallel Intel microprocessor interface. In Serial microprocessor interface, this pin should be left open. Pin Description 20 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Name I/O Pin No. Description IM Input (Pull-Up) AC17 IM: Interface Mode Selection In Parallel Motorola or Intel microprocessor interface, IM selects multiplexed bus or non-multiplexed bus for the device: GNDD - Parallel Motorola /Intel Non-Multiplexed microprocessor interface. Open - Parallel Motorola /Intel Multiplexed microprocessor interface. In Serial microprocessor interface, this pin should be connected to GNDD. ALE / AS Input AD17 ALE: Address Latch Enable In Parallel Intel Multiplexed microprocessor interface, this multiplex pin is used as ALE. The address on A[10:8] and D[7:0] (A[7:0] are ignored) is sampled into the device on the falling edges of ALE. AS: Address Strobe In Parallel Motorola Multiplexed microprocessor interface, this multiplex pin is used as AS. The address on A[10:8] and D[7:0] (A[7:0] are ignored) is latched into the device on the falling edges of AS. In Parallel Motorola /Intel Non-Multiplexed microprocessor interface, this pin should be pulled high. In Serial microprocessor interface, this pin should be connected to GNDD. SCLK / DS / RD Input AE18 SCLK: Shift Clock In Serial microprocessor interface, this multiplex pin is used as SCLK. SCLK inputs the shift clock for the Serial microprocessor interface. Data on SDI is sampled by the device on the rising edge of SCLK. Data on SDO is updated on the falling edge of SCLK. DS: Data Strobe (Active Low) In Parallel Motorola microprocessor interface, this multiplex pin is used as DS. During a write operation (R/W = 0), data on D[7:0] is sampled into the device. During a read operation (R/W = 1), data is driven to D[7:0] by the device. RD: Read Strobe (Active Low) In Parallel Intel microprocessor interface, this multiplex pin is used as RD. RD is asserted low by the microprocessor to initiate a read operation. Data is driven to D[7:0] by the device during the read operation. SDI / R/W / WR Input AF17 SDI: Serial Data Input In Serial microprocessor interface, this multiplex pin is used as SDI. Address and data on this pin are serially clocked into the device on the rising edge of SCLK. R/W: Read / Write Select In Parallel Motorola microprocessor interface, this multiplex pin is used as R/W. R/W is asserted low for write operation or high for read operation. WR: Write Strobe (Active Low) In Parallel Intel microprocessor interface, this multiplex pin is used as WR. WR is asserted low by the microprocessor to initiate a write operation. Data on D[7:0] is sampled into the device during a write operation. Pin Description 21 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Name I/O Pin No. SDO / ACK / RDY Output AE17 Description SDO: Serial Data Output In Serial microprocessor interface, this multiplex pin is used as SDO. Data on this pin is serially clocked out of the device on the falling edge of SCLK. ACK: Acknowledge Output (Active Low) In Parallel Motorola microprocessor interface, this multiplex pin is used as ACK. A low level on ACK indicates that valid information on the data bus is ready for a read operation or acknowledges the acceptance of the written data during a write operation. RDY: Ready Output In Parallel Intel microprocessor interface, this multiplex pin is used as RDY. A high level on RDY reports to the microprocessor that a read/write cycle can be completed. A low level on RDY reports that wait states must be inserted. D[0] D[1] D[2] D[3] D[4] D[5] D[6] D[7] Output / Input AF13 AC12 AD12 AE12 AF12 AD11 AE11 AF11 D[7:0]: Bi-directional Data Bus In Parallel Motorola /Intel Non-Multiplexed microprocessor interface, these pins are the bidirectional data bus of the microprocessor interface. In Parallel Motorola /Intel Multiplexed microprocessor interface, these pins are the multiplexed bi-directional address /data bus. In Serial microprocessor interface, these pins should be connected to GNDD. A[0] A[1] A[2] A[3] A[4] A[5] A[6] A[7] A[8] A[9] A[10] Input AE16 AF16 AD15 AE15 AF15 AC14 AD14 AE14 AF14 AD13 AE13 A[10:0]: Address Bus In Parallel Motorola /Intel Non-Multiplexed microprocessor interface, these pins are the address bus of the microprocessor interface. In Parallel Motorola /Intel Multiplexed microprocessor interface, A[10:8], together with D[7:0], are the address bus; while A[7:0] should be connected to GNDD. In Serial microprocessor interface, these pins should be connected to GNDD. JTAG (per IEEE 1149.1) TRST Input Pull-Down AE7 TRST: JTAG Test Reset (Active Low) A low signal on this pin resets the JTAG test port. To ensure deterministic operation of the test logic, TMS should be held high when the signal on TRST changes from low to high. This pin may be left unconnected when JTAG is not used. This pin has an internal pull-down resistor. TMS Input Pull-up AD7 TMS: JTAG Test Mode Select The signal on this pin controls the JTAG test performance and is sampled on the rising edge of TCK. To ensure deterministic operation of the test logic, TMS should be held high when the signal on TRST changes from low to high. This pin may be left unconnected when JTAG is not used. This pin has an internal pull-up resistor. TCK Input AE8 TCK: JTAG Test Clock The clock for the JTAG test is input on this pin. TDI and TMS are sampled on the rising edge of TCK and TDO is updated on the falling edge of TCK. When TCK is idle at low state, all stored-state devices contained in the test logic shall retain their state indefinitely. This pin should be connected to GNDD when JTAG is not used. Pin Description 22 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Name I/O Pin No. Description TDI Input Pull-up AF8 TDI: JTAG Test Data Input The test data is input on this pin. It is clocked into the device on the rising edge of TCK. This pin has an internal pull-up resistor. This pin may be left unconnected when JTAG is not used. TDO Output AD8 TDO: JTAG Test Data Output The test data is output on this pin. It is clocked out of the device on the falling edge of TCK. TDO is a High-Z output signal except during the process of data scanning. Power & Ground VDDIO A7, B7, C7, D7, D8, D9, D19, D21, VDDIO: 3.3 V I/O Power Supply D22, W23, AA4, AA23, AC4, AC11, AC13, AC15 VDDA C1, C2, C25, C26, D1, D2, D25, D26, W1, W2, W25, W26 VDDA: 3.3 V Analog Core Power Supply VDDD C11, D11, D13, D15, D17, AC5, AC7, AC9, AC18, AC20, AC23 VDDD: 1.8 V Digital Core Power Supply VDDRn J3, K3, N3, P3, U3, T24, R24, M24, VDDRn: 3.3 V Power Supply for Receiver L24, H24, G24, D24, D23, C6, C5, E3, F3 (N=0~16) VDDTn J2, K2, N2, P2, U2, T25, R25, M25, VDDTn: 3.3 V Power Supply for Transmitter Driver L25, H25, G25, B24, B23, B6, B5, E2, F2 (N=0~16) GNDA A1, A2, A25, A26, B1, B2, B25, GNDA: GND for Analog Core / Receiver B26, D4, E23, F23, G4, H4, J23, K23, L4, M4, N23, P23, R4, T4, U23, V2, V3, V23, AE1, AE2, AE25, AE26, AF1, AF2, AF25, AF26 GNDD K10, K11, K12, K13, K14, K15, K16, GNDD: Digital GND K17, L10, L11, L12, L13, L14, L15, L16, L17, M10, M11, M12, M13, M14, M15, M16, M17, N10, N11, N12, N13, N14, N15, N16, N17, P10, P11, P12, P13, P14, P15, P16, P17, R10, R11, R12, R13, R14, R15, R16, R17, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, U10, U11, U12, U13, U14, U15, U16, U17 GNDT B3, B4, D3, E25, F25, G2, H2, J25, GNDT: Analog GND for Transmitter Driver K25, L2, M2, N25, P25, R2, T2, U25, V25 TEST IC - AE10 IC: Internal Connected This pin is for IDT use only and should be connected to GNDD. Others NC Pin Description - C22 NC: Not Connected 23 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 3.1 T1 / E1 / J1 MODE SELECTION The IDT82P2816 can be configured to T1/J1 mode or E1 mode globally or on a per-channel basis. The configuration is determined by the TEHWE pin, the TEHW pin and the T1E1 bit (b0, CHCF,...). Refer to Table-1 for details of the operation mode selection. Table-1 Operation Mode Selection TEHWE Pin TEHW Pin T1E1 Bit Operation Mode Global Programming Per-Channel Programming Open Low Open Low (The configuration of this pin is ignored) (The configuration of this bit is ignored). T1/J1 E1 0 1 T1/J1 E1 3.2 RECEIVE PATH Physical And Electrical Specifications. 3.2.1 RX TERMINATION External Impedance Matching circuit uses an external resistor (Rr) only. The receive line interface supports Receive Differential mode and Receive Single Ended mode, as selected by the R_SING bit (b3, RCF0,...). In Receive Differential mode, both RTIPn and RRINGn are used to receive signal from the line side. In Receive Single Ended mode, only RTIPn is used to receive signal. RIM RTIP In Receive Differential mode, the line interface can be connected with T1 100 Ω, J1 110 Ω or E1 120 Ω twisted pair cable or E1 75 Ω coaxial cable. In Receiver Single Ended mode, the line interface can only be connected with 75 Ω coaxial cable. 1 0 1 R_TERM2 Receive path The receive impedance matching is realized by using internal impedance matching or external impedance matching for each channel in different applications. R120IN 1 0 3.2.1.1 Receive Differential Mode Rr = 120 Ω In Receive Differential mode, three kinds of impedance matching are supported: Fully Internal Impedance Matching, Partially Internal Impedance Matching and External Impedance Matching. Figure-3 shows an overview of how these Impedance Matching modes are switched. IM R_TERM[1:0] RRING Figure-3 Switch between Impedance Matching Modes Fully Internal Impedance Matching circuit uses an internal programmable resistor (IM) only and does not use an external resistor. This configuration saves external components and supports 1:1 Hitless Protection Switching (HPS) applications without relays. Refer to Section 4.4 Hitless Protection Switching (HPS) Summary. To support some particular applications, such as hot-swap or Hitless Protection Switch (HPS) hot-switchover, RTIPn/RRINGn must be forced to enter high impedance state (i.e., External Impedance Matching). For hot-swap, RTIPn/RRINGn must be always held in high impedance state during /after power up; for HPS hot-switchover, RTIPn/RRINGn must enter high impedance state immediately after switchover. Though each channel can be individually configured to External Impedance Matching through register access, it is too slow for hitless switch. Therefore, a hardware pin - RIM - is provided to globally control the high impedance for all 17 receivers. Partially Internal Impedance Matching circuit consists of an internal programmable resistor (IM) and a value-fixed 120 Ω external resistor (Rr). Compared with Fully Internal Impedance Matching, this configuration provides considerable savings in power dissipation of the device. For example, In E1 120 Ω PRBS mode, the power savings would be 0.44 W. For power savings in other modes, please refer to Chapter 8 Functional Description 0 RIN 24 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT RCF0,...). If the R_TERM[2] bit (b2, RCF0,...) is ‘1’, external impedance matching is enabled. The configuration of the R120IN bit (b4, RCF0,...) and the R_TERM[1:0] bits (b1~0, RCF0,...) is ignored. When RIM is low, only External Impedance Matching is supported for all 17 receivers and the per-channel impedance matching configuration bits - the R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) and the R120IN bit (b4, RCF0,...) - are ignored. A twisted pair cable can be connected with a 1:1 transformer or without a transformer (transformer-less), while a coaxial cable must be connected with a 1:1 transformer. Table 2 lists the recommended impedance matching value in different applications. Figure-4 to Figure-6 show the connection for one channel. When RIM is high, impedance matching is configured on a perchannel basis. Three kinds of impedance matching are all supported and selected by the R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) and the R120IN bit (b4, RCF0,...). The R_TERM[2] bit (b2, RCF0,...) should be set to match internal or external impedance. If the R_TERM[2] bit (b2, RCF0,...) is ‘0’, internal impedance matching is enabled. The R120IN bit (b4, RCF0,...) should be set to select Partially Internal Impedance Matching or Fully Internal Impedance Matching. The internal programmable resistor (IM) is determined by the R_TERM[1:0] bits (b1~0, The transformer-less connection will offer a termination option with reduced cost and board space. However, the waveform amplitude is not standard compliant, and surge protection and common mode depression should be enhanced depending on equipment environment. Table-2 Impedance Matching Value in Receive Differential Mode Partially Internal Impedance Matching (R120IN = 0) 1 Cable Condition R_TERM[2:0] Rr Fully Internal Impedance Matching (R120IN = 1) 1, 2 R_TERM[2:0] T1 100 Ω twisted pair (with transformer) 000 000 J1 110 Ω twisted pair (with transformer) 001 001 E1 120 Ω twisted pair (with transformer) 010 010 E1 75 Ω coaxial (with transformer) 011 T1 100 Ω twisted pair (transformer-less4) 000 J1 110 Ω twisted pair (transformer-less) 001 E1 120 Ω twisted pair (transformer-less) 010 External Impedance Matching R_TERM[2:0] 3 Rr 100 Ω 110 Ω (open) 120 Ω 011 120 Ω Rr 1XX 75 Ω 100 Ω (not supported) 110 Ω 120 Ω Note: 1. Partially Internal Impedance Matching and Fully Internal Impedance Matching are not supported when RIM is low. 2. Fully Internal Impedance Matching is not supported in transformer-less applications. 3. When RIM is low, the setting of the R_TERM[2:0] bits is ignored. 4. In transformer-less applications, the device should be protected against overvoltage. There are three important standards for overvoltage protection: • UL1950 and FCC Part 68; • Telcordia (Bellcore) GR-1089 • ITU-T K.20, K.21 and K.41 1:1 6.0 Vpp 1:1 RTIPn Rr IM 4.74 Vpp RRINGn Rr IM RRINGn Figure-4 Receive Differential Line Interface with Twisted Pair Cable (with transformer) Functional Description RTIPn Figure-5 Receive Differential Line Interface with Coaxial Cable (with transformer) 25 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 3.2.1.2 Receive Single Ended Mode RTIPn 6.0Vpp Rr/2 Rr/2 RRINGn VCOM1 Receive Single Ended mode can only be used in 75 Ω coaxial cable applications. IM In Receive Single Ended mode, only External Impedance Matching is supported. External Impedance Matching circuit uses an external resistor (Rr) only. The value of the resistor is 18.75 Ω (see Figure-7 for details) when the single end is connected with a 2:1 transformer or is 75 Ω (see Figure-8 for details) when the single end is connected without a transformer. VCOM0 10 µF In Receive Single Ended mode, the RIM pin should be left open and the configuration of the R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) is ignored. Note: 1. Two Rr/2 resistors should be connected to VCOM[1:0] that are coupled to ground via a 10 µF capacitor, which provide 60 Ω common mode input resistance. 2. In this mode, lightning protection should be enhanced. 3. The maximum input dynamic range of RTIP/TRING pin is -0.3 V ~3.6 V (in line monitor mode it is -0.3 V ~ 2 V) 2:1 Figure-6 Receive Differential Line Interface with Twisted Pair Cable (transformer-less, non standard compliant) RTIPn 470 nF Rr RRINGn 4.74 Vpp IM Figure-7 Receive Single Ended Line Interface with Coaxial Cable (with transformer) Rr1 RTIPn 470 nF 4.74 Vpp Rr2 RRINGn IM Rr = Rr1 + Rr2 = 75 Ω Note: In this mode, port protection should be enhanced. Figure-8 Receive Single Ended Line Interface with Coaxial Cable (transformer-less, non standard compliant) Functional Description 26 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.2.2 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT EQUALIZER DSX cross connect point The equalizer compensates high frequency attenuation to enhance receive sensitivity. RTIPn 3.2.2.1 Line Monitor monitor gain = 0 dB In both T1/J1 and E1 short haul applications, the Protected NonIntrusive Monitoring per T1.102 can be performed between two devices. The monitored channel of one device is in normal operation, and the monitoring channel of the other device taps the monitored one through a high impedance bridging circuit (refer to Figure-9 and Figure-10). RRINGn R RTIPn R monitor gain = 20/26/32 dB r After the high resistance bridging circuit, the signal arriving at RTIPn/ RRINGn of the monitoring channel is dramatically attenuated. To compensate this bridge resistive attenuation, Monitor Gain can be used to boost the signal by 20 dB, 26 dB or 32 dB, as selected by the MG[1:0] bits (b1~0, RCF2,...). For normal operation, the Monitor Gain should be set to 0 dB, i.e., the Monitor Gain of the monitored channel should be 0 dB. monitored channel RRINGn monitoring channel Figure-9 Receive Path Monitoring DSX cross connect point The monitoring channel can be configured to any of the External, Partially Internal or Fully Internal Impedance Matching mode. Here the external r or internal IM is used for voltage division, not for impedance matching. That is, the r (IM) and the two R make up of a resistance bridge. The resistive attenuation of this bridge is 20lg(r/(2R+r)) dB. TTIPn monitor gain = 0 dB TRINGn monitored channel R Note that line monitor is only available in differential line interface. R A channel 0 monitoring function is provided (refer to Section 3.5.9 Channel 0 Monitoring). If multiple High-Density LIUs are used in an application, The G.772 function of channel 0 can be used to route the signals of channel 1~16 Receive and Transmit to channel 0 of the same device. This channel 0 Transmit TTIP and TTRING could then be monitored by another device through the Line Monitor function. RTIPn r monitor gain = 20/26/32 dB RRINGn monitoring channel Figure-10 Transmit Path Monitoring 3.2.2.2 Receive Sensitivity The receive sensitivity is the minimum range of receive signal level for which the receiver recovers data error-free with -18 dB interference signal added. For Receive Differential line interface, the receive sensitivity is -15 dB. For Receive Single Ended line interface, the receive sensitivity is -12 dB. Functional Description 27 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.2.3 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT recovered clock (RCLK) or XOR output of positive and negative sliced data. Refer to Section 3.5.7.1 RMFn Indication for the description of RMFn. SLICER The Slicer is used to generate a standard amplitude mark or a space according to the amplitude of the input signals. The input signal is sliced at 50% of the peak value. 3.2.4 If data is output on RDPn and RDNn in NRZ format and the recovered clock is output on RCLKn, the receive system interface is in Dual Rail NRZ Format mode. In this mode, the data is un-decoded and updated on the active edge of RCLKn. RCLKn outputs a 1.544 MHz (in T1/J1 mode) or 2.048 MHz (in E1 mode) clock. RX CLOCK & DATA RECOVERY The Rx Clock & Data Recovery is used to recover the clock signal from the received data. It is accomplished by an integrated Digital Phase Locked Loop (DPLL). The recovered clock tracks the jitter in the data output from the Slicer and keeps the phase relationship between data and clock during the absence of the incoming pulse. If data is output on RDPn and RDNn in RZ format and the recovered clock is output on RCLKn, the receive system interface is in Dual Rail RZ Format mode. In this mode, the data is un-decoded and updated on the active edge of RCLKn. RCLKn outputs a 1.544 MHz (in T1/J1 mode) or 2.048 MHz (in E1 mode) clock. Note that the IDT82P2816 also provides programmable REFA and REFB pins to output any of the 17 recovered line clocks. Refer to Section 3.6 Clock Inputs and Outputs for details. 3.2.5 If data is output on RDPn and RDNn in RZ format directly after passing through the Slicer, the receive system interface is in Dual Rail Sliced mode. In this mode, the data is raw sliced and un-decoded. RMFn can be selected to indicate PRBS/ARB, LAIS, LEXZ, LBPV, LEXZ + LBPV, LLOS, output recovered clock (RCLK) or XOR output of positive and negative sliced data. Refer to Chapter 3.5.7.1 RMFn Indication for the description of RMFn. DECODER The Decoder is used only when the receive system interface is in Single Rail NRZ Format mode. When the receive system interface is in other modes, the Decoder is bypassed automatically. (Refer to Section 3.2.6 Receive System Interface for the description of the receive system interface). Table-3 summarizes the multiplex pin used in different receive system interface. In T1/J1 mode, the received signal is decoded by AMI or B8ZS line code rule. In E1 mode, the received signal is decoded by AMI or HDB3 line code rule. The line code rule is selected by the R_CODE bit (b2, RCF1,...). 3.2.6 Table-3 Multiplex Pin Used in Receive System Interface RECEIVE SYSTEM INTERFACE Receive System Interface The received data can be output to the system side in four modes: Single Rail NRZ Format mode, Dual Rail NRZ Format mode, Dual Rail RZ Format mode and Dual Rail Sliced mode, as selected by the R_MD[1:0] bits (b1~0, RCF1). If data is output on RDn in NRZ format and the recovered clock is output on RCLKn, the receive system interface is in Single Rail NRZ Format mode. In this mode, the data is decoded and updated on the active edge of RCLKn. RCLKn outputs a 1.544 MHz (in T1/J1 mode) or 2.048 MHz (in E1 mode) clock. The Receive Multiplex Function (RMFn) signal is updated on the active edge of RCLKn and can be selected to indicate PRBS/ARB, LAIS, LEXZ, LBPV, LEXZ + LBPV, LLOS, output Functional Description Multiplex Pin Used On Receive System Interface RDn / RDPn RDNn / RMFn RCLKn / RMFn Single Rail NRZ Format RDn 1 RMFn 2 RCLKn 3 Dual Rail NRZ Format RDPn 1 RDNn 1 RCLKn 3 Dual Rail RZ Format RDPn 1 RDNn 1 RCLKn 3 Dual Rail Sliced RDPn 1 RDNn 1 RMFn 2 Note: 1. The active level on RDn, RDPn and RDNn is selected by the RD_INV bit (b3, RCF1,...). 2. RMFn is always active high. 3. The active edge of RCLKn is selected by the RCK_ES bit (b4, RCF1,...). 28 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.2.7 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT RECEIVER POWER DOWN Set the R_OFF bit (b5, RCF0,...) to ‘1’ will power down the corresponding receiver. 3.3 TRANSMIT PATH 3.3.1 TRANSMIT SYSTEM INTERFACE The data from the system side is input to the device in three modes: Single Rail NRZ Format mode, Dual Rail NRZ Format mode and Dual Rail RZ Format mode, as selected by the T_MD[1:0] bits (b1~0, TCF1,...). In this way, the corresponding receive circuit is turned off and the RTIPn/RRINGn pins are forced to High-Z state. The pins on receive system interface (including RDn/RDPn, RDNn/RMFn, RCLKn/RMFn) will be in High-Z state if the RHZ bit (b6, RCF0,...) is ‘1’ or in low level if the RHZ bit (b6, RCF0,...) is ‘0’. If data is input on TDn in NRZ format and a 1.544 MHz (in T1/J1 mode) or 2.048 MHz (in E1 mode) clock is input on TCLKn, the transmit system interface is in Single Rail NRZ Format mode. In this mode, the data is encoded and sampled on the active edge of TCLKn. TMFn is updated on the active edge of TCLKn and can be selected to indicate PRBS/ARB, SAIS, TOC, TLOS or SEXZ. Refer to Section 3.5.7.2 TMFn Indication for the description of TMFn. After clearing the R_OFF bit (b5, RCF0,...), it will take 1 ms for the receiver to achieve steady state, i.e., to return to the previous configuration and performance. If data is input on TDPn and TDNn in NRZ format and a 1.544 MHz (in T1/J1 mode) or 2.048 MHz (in E1 mode) clock is input on TCLKn, the transmit system interface is in Dual Rail NRZ Format mode. In this mode, the data is pre-encoded and sampled on the active edge of TCLKn. If data is input on TDPn and TDNn in RZ format and no transmit clock is input, the transmit system interface is in Dual Rail RZ Format mode. In this mode, the data is pre-encoded. TMFn can be selected to indicate PRBS/ARB, SAIS, TOC, TLOS, SEXZ, SBPV, SEXZ + SBPV or SLOS. Refer to Section 3.5.7.2 TMFn Indication for the description of TMFn. The Tx Clock Recovery block is used to recover the clock signal from the data input on TDPn and TDNn. Refer to Section 3.3.2 Tx Clock Recovery. Table-4 summarizes the multiplex pin used in different transmit system interface. Functional Description 29 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 3.3.4 Table-4 Multiplex Pin Used in Transmit System Interface The IDT82P2816 provides two ways to manipulate the pulse shape before data is transmitted: • Preset Waveform Template; • User-Programmable Arbitrary Waveform. Multiplex Pin Used On Transmit System Interface Transmit System Interface TDn / TDPn TDNn / TMFn TCLKn / TDNn Single Rail NRZ Format TDn 1 TMFn 2 TCLKn 3 Dual Rail NRZ Format TDPn 1 TDNn 1 TCLKn 3 Dual Rail RZ Format TDPn 1 TMFn 2 TDNn 1 3.3.4.1 Preset Waveform Template In T1/J1 applications, the waveform template meets T1.102. The T1 template is shown in Figure-11. It is measured in the far end, as shown in Figure-12. The J1 template is measured in the near end line side. In T1 applications, to meet the template, five preset waveform templates are provided according to five grades of cable length. The selection is made by the PULS[3:0] bits (b3~0, PULS,...). In J1 applications, the PULS[3:0] bits (b3~0, PULS,...) should be set to ‘0111’. Refer to Table-5 for details. Note: 1. The active level on TDn, TDPn and TDNn is selected by the TD_INV bit (b3, TCF1,...). 2. TMFn is always active high. 3. The active edge of TCLKn is selected by the TCK_ES bit (b4, TCF1,...). If TCLKn is missing, i.e., no transition for more than 64 T1/E1 clock cycles, the TCKLOS_S bit (b3, STAT0,...) will be set. A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the TCKLOS_S bit (b3, STAT0,...) or any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the TCKLOS_S bit (b3, STAT0,...) will set the TCKLOS_IS bit (b3, INTS0,...) to ‘1’, as selected by the TCKLOS_IES bit (b3, INTES,...). When the TCKLOS_IS bit (b3, INTS0,...) is ‘1’, an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the TCKLOS_IM bit (b3, INTM0,...). 1.2 1 0.8 Normalized Amplitude 3.3.2 TX CLOCK RECOVERY The Tx Clock Recovery is used only when the transmit system interface is in Dual Rail RZ Format mode. When the transmit system interface is in other modes, the Tx Clock Recovery is bypassed automatically. 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 -0.2 -0.4 The Tx Clock Recovery is used to recover the clock signal from the data input on TDPn and TDNn. 3.3.3 WAVEFORM SHAPER -0.6 0 250 ENCODER 500 750 1000 1250 Time (ns) The Encoder is used only when the transmit system interface is in Single Rail NRZ Format mode. When the transmit system interface is in other modes, the Encoder is bypassed automatically. Figure-11 DSX-1 Waveform Template In T1/J1 mode, the data to be transmitted is encoded by AMI or B8ZS line code rule. In E1 mode, the data to be transmitted is encoded by AMI or HDB3 line code rule. The line code rule is selected by the T_CODE bit (b2, TCF1,...). TTIPn Cable IDT82P2816 RLOAD VOUT TRINGn Note: RLOAD = 100 Ω + 5% Figure-12 T1 Waveform Template Measurement Circuit Functional Description 30 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Table-5 PULS[3:0] Setting in T1/J1 Mode TTIPn Cable Conditions PULS[3:0] DSX1 - 0 ~ 133 ft 0010 DSX1 - 133 ~ 266 ft 0011 DSX1 - 266 ~ 399 ft 0100 DSX1 - 399 ~ 533 ft 0101 DSX1 - 533 ~ 655 ft 0110 Figure-14 E1 Waveform Template Measurement Circuit J1 - 0 ~ 655 ft 0111 Table-6 PULS[3:0] Setting in E1 Mode IDT82P2816 Note: RLOAD = 75 Ω or 120 Ω (+ 5%) Interface Conditions PULS[3:0] E1 75 Ω differential interface, 0000 Internal Impedance matching mode In E1 applications, the PULS[3:0] should be set to ‘0000’ if differential signals (output from TTIP and TRING) are coupled to a 75 Ω coaxial cable using Internal Impedance matching mode; the PULS[3:0] should be set to ‘0001’ for other E1 interfaces. Refer to Table-6 for details. Other E1 interface 0001 After one of the preset waveform templates is selected, the preset waveform amplitude can be adjusted to get the desired waveform. In T1 mode, the standard value of the SCAL[5:0] bits (b5~0, SCAL,...) is ‘110110’ which is also the default value. The adjusting is made by increasing or decreasing by ‘1’ from the standard value to scale up or down at a percentage ratio of 2% against the preset waveform amplitude. 1.20 1.00 Normalized Amplitude VOUT TRINGn In E1 applications, the waveform template meets G.703, as shown in Figure-13. It is measured in the near end line side, as shown in Figure14. 0.80 In E1 mode, the SCAL[5:0] bits (b5~0, SCAL,...) should be set to ‘100001’ to get the standard amplitude. The adjusting is made by increasing or decreasing by ‘1’ from the standard value to scale up or down at a percentage ratio of 3%. 0.60 0.40 In summary, do the following step by step, the desired waveform will be got based on the preset waveform template: • Select one preset waveform template by setting the PULS[3:0] bits (b3~0, PULS,...); • Write ‘100001 to the SCAL[5:0] bits (b5~0, SCAL,...) if E1 mode is selected. • Write the scaling value to the SCAL[5:0] bits (b5~0, SCAL,...) to scale the amplitude of the selected preset waveform template (this step is optional). 0.20 0.00 -0.20 RLOAD -0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 Time in Unit Intervals Figure-13 E1 Waveform Template Functional Description 31 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT In summary, do the following for the write operation: • Modify the sample data in the AWG1 register; • Write the AWG0 register to implement the write operation, including: - Write the sample address to the SAMP[4:0] bits (b4~0, AWG0,...); - Write ‘0’ to the RW bit (b5, AWG0,...); - Write ‘1’ to the DONE bit (b6, AWG0,...). 3.3.4.2 User-Programmable Arbitrary Waveform When the PULS[3:0] bits (b3~0, PULS,...) are set to ‘1XXX’, userprogrammable arbitrary waveform will be used in the corresponding channel. 1 4 Each waveform shape can extend up to 1 --- UIs (Unit Interval), and is divided into 20 sub-phases that are addressed by the SAMP[4:0] bits (b4~0, AWG0,...). The waveform amplitude of each phase is represented by a binary byte, within the range from +63 to -63, stored in the WDAT[6:0] bits (b6~0, AWG1,...) in signed magnitude form. The maximum number +63 (D) represents the maximum positive amplitude of the transmit pulse while the most negative number -63 (D) represents the maximum negative amplitude of the transmit pulse. Therefore, up to 20 bytes are used. Do the following for the read operation: • Write the AWG0 register, including: - Write sample address to the SAMP[4:0] bits (b4~0, AWG0,...); - Write ‘1’ to the RW bit (b5, AWG0,...); - Write ‘1’ to the DONE bit (b6, AWG0,...); • Read the AWG1 register to get the sample data. When the write operation is completed, write the scaling value to the SCAL[5:0] bits (b5~0, SCAL,...) to scale the amplitude of the selected standard waveform (- this step is optional). There are eight standard templates which are stored in a local ROM. One of them can be selected as reference and made some changes to get the desired waveform. When more than one UI is used to compose the waveform template and the waveform amplitude is not set properly, the overlap of the two consecutive waveforms will make the waveform amplitude overflow (i.e., exceed the maximum limitation). This overflow is captured by the DAC_IS bit (b7, INTS0,...) and will be reported by the INT pin if enabled by the DAC_IM bit (b7, INTM0,...). To do this, the first step is to choose a set of waveform value from the standard templates. The selected waveform value should be the most similar to the desired waveform shape. Table-7 to Table-14 list the sample data of each template. Then modify the sample data to get the desired transmit waveform shape. By increasing or decreasing by ‘1’ from the standard value in the SCAL[5:0] bits (b5~0, SCAL,...), the waveform amplitude will be scaled up or down. Functional Description Refer to application note AN-513 ‘User-Programmable Arbitrary Waveform for DSX1’ for more details. 32 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Table-7 Transmit Waveform Value for T1 0 ~ 133 ft SAMP[4:0] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 WDAT[6:0] 17H 27H 27H 26H 25H 25H 25H 24H 23H 4AH 4AH 49H 47H 45H 44H 43H 42H 41H 00H 00H Table-8 Transmit Waveform Value for T1 133 ~ 266 ft SAMP[4:0] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 WDAT[6:0] 1BH 2EH 2CH 2AH 29H 28H 27H 26H 25H 50H 4FH 4DH 4AH 48H 46H 44H 43H 42H 41H 00H Table-9 Transmit Waveform Value for T1 266 ~ 399 ft SAMP[4:0] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 WDAT[6:0] 1FH 34H 2FH 2CH 2BH 2AH 29H 28H 25H 57H 53H 50H 4BH 48H 46H 44H 43H 42H 41H 00H Table-10 Transmit Waveform Value for T1 399 ~ 533 ft SAMP[4:0] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 WDAT[6:0] 20H 3BH 35H 2FH 2EH 2DH 2CH 2AH 28H 58H 58H 53H 4CH 48H 46H 44H 43H 42H 41H 00H Table-11 Transmit Waveform Value for T1 533 ~ 655 ft SAMP[4:0] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 WDAT[6:0] 20H 3FH 38H 33H 2FH 2EH 2DH 2CH 29H 5FH 5EH 57H 4FH 49H 47H 44H 43H 42H 41H 00H Table-12 Transmit Waveform Value for E1 75 ohm SAMP[4:0] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 WDAT[6:0] 00H 00H 00H 0CH 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H Table-13 Transmit Waveform Value for E1 120 ohm SAMP[4:0] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 WDAT[6:0] 00H 00H 00H 0FH 3CH 3CH 3CH 3CH 3CH 3CH 3CH 3CH 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H Table-14 Transmit Waveform Value for J1 0 ~ 655 ft SAMP[4:0] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 WDAT[6:0] 17H 27H 27H 26H 25H 25H 25H 24H 23H 4AH 4AH 49H 47H 45H 44H 43H 42H 41H 00H 00H Functional Description 33 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.3.5 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT LINE DRIVER 3.3.6 The Line Driver can be set to High-Z for protection or in redundant applications. TX TERMINATION The transmit line interface supports Transmit Differential mode and Transmit Single Ended mode, as selected by the T_SING bit (b3, TCF0,...). In Transmit Differential mode, both TTIPn and TRINGn are used to transmit signals to the line side. In Transmit Single Ended mode, only TTIPn is used to transmit signal. The following two ways will set the Line Driver to High-Z: • Setting the OE pin to low will globally set all the Line Drivers to High-Z; • Setting the OE bit (b6, TCF0,...) to ‘0’ will set the corresponding Line Driver to High-Z. The line interface can be connected with T1 100 Ω, J1 110 Ω or E1 120 Ω twisted pair cable or E1 75 Ω coaxial cable. By these ways, the functionality of the internal circuit is not affected and TTIPn and TRINGn will enter High-Z state immediately. The transmit impedance matching is realized by using internal impedance matching or external impedance matching for each channel in different applications. 3.3.5.1 Transmit Over Current Protection 3.3.6.1 Transmit Differential Mode The Line Driver monitors the Transmit Over Current (TOC) on the line interface. When TOC is detected, the driver’s output (i.e., output on TTIPn/TRINGn) is determined by the THZ_OC bit (b4, TCF0,...). If the THZ_OC bit (b4, TCF0,...) is ‘0’, the driver’s output current (peak to peak) is limited to 100 mA; if the THZ_OC bit (b4, TCF0,...) is ‘1’, the driver’s output will enter High-Z. TOC is indicated by the TOC_S bit (b4, STAT0,...). A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the TOC_S bit (b4, STAT0,...) or any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the TOC_S bit (b4, STAT0,...) will set the TOC_IS bit (b4, INTS0,...) to ‘1’, as selected by the TOC_IES bit (b4, INTES,...). When the TOC_IS bit (b4, INTS0,...) is ‘1’, an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the TOC_IM bit (b4, INTM0,...). In Transmit Differential mode, different applications have different impedance matching. For T1/J1 applications, only Internal Impedance Matching is supported. For E1 applications, both Internal and External Impedance Matching are supported. Internal Impedance Matching circuit uses an internal programmable resistor (IM) only. External Impedance Matching circuit uses an external resistor (Rt) only. A twisted pair cable can be connected with a 1:2 (step up) transformer or without a transformer (transformer-less), while a coaxial cable must be connected with a 1:2 transformer. TOC may be indicated by the TMFn pin. Refer to Section 3.5.7.2 TMFn Indication for details. The T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) should be set according to different cable conditions, whether a transformer is used, and what kind of Impedance Matching is selected. Table-15 lists the recommended impedance matching value in different applications. Figure-15 to Figure-17 show the connection for one channel in different applications. The transformer-less connection will offer a termination option with reduced cost and board space. However, the waveform amplitude is not standard compliant, and surge protection and common mode depression should be enhanced depending on equipment environment.. Table-15 Impedance Matching Value in Transmit Differential Mode Internal Impedance Matching External Impedance Matching Cable Condition T_TERM[2:0] T1 100 Ω twisted pair (with transformer) 000 J1 110 Ω twisted pair (with transformer) 001 E1 120 Ω twisted pair (with transformer), PULS[3:0]=0001 010 E1 75 Ω coaxial (with transformer), PULS[3:0]=0000 011 T1 100 Ω twisted pair (transformer-less) 100 J1 110 Ω twisted pair (transformer-less) 101 E1 120 Ω twisted pair (transformer-less), PULS[3:0]=0001 110 Functional Description Rt T_TERM[2:0] Rt (not supported) 10 Ω 111 0 (not supported) 34 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 3.3.6.2 Transmit Single Ended Mode 1:2 TTIPn Rt IM Transmit Single Ended mode can only be used in 75 Ω coaxial cable applications. 6.0 Vpp Rt In Transmit Single Ended mode, only Internal Impedance Matching is supported. Internal Impedance Matching circuit uses an internal programmable resistor (IM) only. The T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) should be set to ‘011’. The output amplitude is 4.74 Vpp when PULS[3:0] is ‘0001’ and the SCAL[5:0] bits (b5~0, SCAL,...) is ‘100001’.1 TRINGn Figure-15 Transmit Differential Line Interface with Twisted Pair Cable (with Transformer) 1:2 TTIPn Rt IM In Single Ended mode, special care has to be taken for termination and overall setup. Refer to separate application note for details. A 1:2 (step up) transformer should be used in application. Figure-18 shows the connection for one channel. 4.74 Vpp Rt TRINGn 1:2 TTIPn Figure-16 Transmit Differential Line Interface with Coaxial Cable (with transformer) IM 4.7 µF 4.74 Vpp TRINGn TTIPn IM Figure-18 Transmit Single Ended Line Interface with Coaxial Cable (with transformer) 3.0Vpp TRINGn Note: In this mode, port protection should be enhanced. Figure-17 Transmit Differential Line Interface with Twisted Pair Cable (transformer-less, non standard compliant) Functional Description 1. The waveform in this mode is not standard. However, if the arbitrary waveform generator is used, the waveform could pass the template marginally. 35 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.3.7 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT TRANSMITTER POWER DOWN 3.3.8 OUTPUT HIGH-Z ON TTIP AND TRING Set the T_OFF bit (b5, TCF0,...) to ‘1’ will power down the corresponding transmitter. TTIPn and TRINGn can be set to High-Z state globally or on a perchannel basis. In this way, the corresponding transmit circuit is turned off. The pins on the transmit line interface (including TTIPn and TRINGn) will be in High-Z state. The input on the transmit system interface (including TDn, TDPn, TDNn and TCLK) is ignored. The output on the transmit system interface (i.e. TMFn) will be in High-Z state. The following three conditions will set TTIPn and TRINGn to High-Z state globally: • Connecting the OE pin to low; • Loss of MCLK (i.e., no transition on MCLK for more than 1 ms); • Power on reset, hardware reset by pulling RST to low for more than 2 µs or global software reset by writing the RST register. After clearing the T_OFF bit (b5, TCF0,...), it will take 1 ms for the transmitter to achieve steady state, i.e., return to the previous configuration and performance. The following six conditions will set TTIPn and TRINGn to High-Z state on a per-channel basis: • Writing ‘0’ to the OE bit (b6, TCF0,...); • Loss of TCLKn in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode or Transmit Dual Rail NRZ Format mode (i.e., no transition on TCLKn for more than 64 XCLK1 cycles) except that the channel is in Remote Loopback or transmit internal pattern with XCLK; • Transmitter power down; • Per-channel software reset by writing ‘1’ to the CHRST bit (b1, CHCF,...); • Setting the THZ_OC bit (b4, TCF0,...) to ‘1’ when transmit driver over-current is detected. 1. XCLK is derived from MCLK. It is 1.544 MHz in T1/J1 mode or 2.048 MHz in E1 mode. Functional Description 36 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.4 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT JITTER ATTENUATOR (RJA & TJA) The DPLL is used to generate a de-jittered clock to clock out the data stored in the FIFO. The DPLL can only attenuate the incoming jitter whose frequency is above Corner Frequency (CF) by 20 dB per decade falling off. The jitter whose frequency is lower than the CF passes through the DPLL without any attenuation. In T1/J1 applications, the CF of the DPLL is 5 Hz or 1.26 Hz. In E1 applications, the CF of the DPLL is 6.77 Hz or 0.87 Hz. The CF is selected by the RJA_BW/TJA_BW bit (b0, RJA/TJA,...). The lower the CF is, the longer time is needed to achieve synchronization. Two Jitter Attenuators are provided for each channel of receiver and transmitter. Each Jitter Attenuator can be enabled or disabled, as determined by the RJA_EN/TJA_EN bit (b3, RJA/TJA,...) respectively. Each Jitter Attenuator consists of a FIFO and a DPLL, as shown in Figure-19. Jittered Data Jittered Clock De-jittered Data FIFO 32/64/128 write clock DPLL If the incoming data moves faster than the outgoing data, the FIFO will overflow. If the incoming data moves slower than the outgoing data, the FIFO will underflow. The overflow and underflow are both captured by the RJA_IS/TJA_IS bit (b5/6, INTS0,...). The occurrence of overflow or underflow will be reported by the INT pin if enabled by the RJA_IM/ TJA_IM bit (b5/6, INTM0,...). read clock De-jittered Clock To avoid overflow or underflow, the JA-Limit function can be enabled by setting the RJA_LIMT/TJA_LIMT bit (b4, RJA/TJA,...). When the JALimit function is enabled, the speed of the outgoing data will be adjusted automatically if the FIFO is 2-bit close to its full or emptiness. Though the JA-Limit function can reduce the possibility of FIFO overflow and underflow, the quality of jitter attenuation is deteriorated. Figure-19 Jitter Attenuator The FIFO is used as a pool to buffer the jittered input data, then the data is clocked out of the FIFO by a de-jittered clock. The depth of the FIFO can be 32 bits, 64 bits or 128 bits, as selected by the RJA_DP[1:0]/ TJA_DP[1:0] bits (b2~1, RJA/TJA,...). Accordingly, the typical delay produced by the Jitter Attenuator is 16 bits, 32 bits or 64 bits. The 128bit FIFO is used when large jitter tolerance is expected, while the 32-bit FIFO is used in delay sensitive applications. Functional Description The performance of the Jitter Attenuator meets ITUT I.431, G.703, G.736-739, G.823, G.824, ETSI 300011, ETSI TBR12/13, AT&T TR62411, TR43802, TR-TSY 009, TR-TSY 253 and TR-TRY 499. Refer to Section 8.12 Jitter Attenuation Characteristics for the jitter performance. 37 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.5 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT DIAGNOSTIC FACILITIES 3.5.1.2 Bipolar Violation (BPV) Insertion The BPV can only be inserted in the transmit path. The diagnostic facilities include: • BPV (Bipolar Violation) / CV (Code Violation) detection and BPV insertion; • EXZ (Excessive Zero) detection; • LOS (Loss Of Signal) detection; • AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) detection and generation; • Pattern generation and detection, including PRBS (Pseudo Random Bit Sequence), ARB (Arbitrary Pattern) and IB (Inband Loopback). A BPV will be inserted on the next available mark in the data stream to be transmitted by writing a ‘1’ to the BPV_INS bit (b6, ERR,...). This bit will be reset once BPV insertion is done. 3.5.2 EXCESSIVE ZEROES (EXZ) DETECTION EXZ is monitored in both the receive path and the transmit path. Different line code has different definition of the EXZ. The IDT82P2816 provides two standards of EXZ definition for each kind of line code rule. The standards are ANSI and FCC, as selected by the EXZ_DEF bit (b7, ERR,...). Refer to Table-16 for details. The above defects, alarms or patterns can be counted by an internal Error Counter, indicated by the respective interrupt bit and indicated by RMFn or TMFn. Table-16 EXZ Definition For diagnostic purposes, loopbacks and channel 0 monitoring can also be implemented. Line Code Rule 3.5.1 BIPOLAR VIOLATION (BPV) / CODE VIOLATION (CV) DETECTION AND BPV INSERTION 3.5.1.1 Bipolar Violation (BPV) / Code Violation (CV) Detection ANSI (EXZ_DEF = 0) FCC (EXZ_DEF = 1) AMI An EXZ is detected when any string of more than 15 consecutive ‘0’s are received. T1/J1 - An EXZ is detected when any string of more than 80 consecutive ‘0’s are received. E1 - An EXZ is detected when any string of more than 15 consecutive ‘0’s are received. B8ZS An EXZ is detected when any string of more than 7 consecutive ‘0’s are received. An EXZ is detected when any string of more than 7 consecutive ‘0’s are received. HDB3 An EXZ is detected when any string of more than 3 consecutive ‘0’s are received. An EXZ is detected when any string of more than 3 consecutive ‘0’s are received. BPV/CV is monitored in both the receive path and the transmit path. BPV is detected when the data is AMI coded and CV is detected when the data is B8ZS/HDB3 coded. If the transmit system interface is in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode, the BPV/CV detection is disabled in the transmit path automatically. A BPV is detected when two consecutive pulses of the same polarity are received. A CV is detected when two consecutive BPVs of the same polarity that are not a part of the B8ZS/HDB3 zero substitution are received. When BPV/CV is detected in the receive path, the Line Bipolar Violation LBPV_IS bit (b4, INTS2,...) will be set and an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the LBPV_IM bit (b4, INTM2,...). When BPV/CV is detected in the transmit path, the System Bipolar Violation SBPV_IS bit (b5, INTS2,...) will be set and an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the SBPV_IM bit (b5, INTM2,...). Definition Note: If the transmit system interface is in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode, the EXZ is detected according to the standard of AMI. BPV/CV may be counted by an internal Error Counter or may be indicated by the RMFn or TMFn pin. Refer to Section 3.5.6 Error Counter and Section 3.5.7 Receive /Transmit Multiplex Function (RMF / TMF) Indication respectively. When EXZ is detected in the receive path, the LEXZ_IS bit (b2, INTS2,...) will be set and an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the LEXZ_IM bit (b2, INTM2,...). When EXZ is detected in the transmit path, the SEXZ_IS bit (b3, INTS2,...) will be set and an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the SEXZ_IM bit (b3, INTM2,...). Functional Description 38 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.5.3 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Two pins (LLOS0 and LLOS) are dedicated to LLOS indication. Whether LLOS is detected in channel 0 or not, LLOS0 is high for a CLKE1 clock cycle to indicate the channel 0 position on LLOS. LLOS indicates LLOS status of all 17 channels in a serial format and repeats every 17 cycles. Refer to Figure-20. LLOS0 and LLOS are updated on the rising edge of CLKE1. When the clock output on CLKE1 is disabled, LLOS0 and LLOS will be held in High-Z state. The output on CLKE1 is controlled by the CLKE1_EN bit (b3, CLKG) and the CLKE1 bit (b2, CLKG). Refer to section 8.11 on page 127 for CLKE1 timing characteristics. LOSS OF SIGNAL (LOS) DETECTION The IDT82P2816 detects three kinds of LOS: • LLOS: Line LOS, detected in the receive path; • SLOS: System LOS, detected in the transmit system side; • TLOS: Transmit LOS, detected in the transmit line side. 3.5.3.1 Line LOS (LLOS) The amplitude and density of the data received from the line side are monitored. When the amplitude of the data is less than Q Vpp for N consecutive pulse intervals, LLOS is declared. When the amplitude of the data is more than P Vpp and the average density of marks is at least 12.5% for M consecutive pulse intervals starting with a mark, LLOS is cleared. Here Q is defined by the ALOS[2:0] bits (b6~4, LOS,...). P is the sum of Q and 250 mVpp. N and M are defined by the LAC bit (b7, LOS,...). Refer to Table-17 for details. LLOS may be counted by an internal Error Counter or may be indicated by the RMFn pin. Refer to Section 3.5.6 Error Counter and Section 3.5.7.1 RMFn Indication respectively. During LLOS, in Receive Single Rail NRZ Format mode, Receive Dual Rail NRZ Format mode and Receive Dual Rail RZ Format mode, RDn and RDPn/RDNn output low level. In Receive Dual Rail Sliced mode RDPn/RDNn still output sliced data. RCLKn (if available) outputs high level or XCLK1, as selected by the RCKH bit (b7, RCF0,...). In T1/J1 mode, LLOS detection supports ANSI T1.231 and I.431. In E1 mode, LLOS detection supports G.775 and ETSI 300233/I.431. The criteria are selected by the LAC bit (b7, LOS,...). When LLOS is detected, the LLOS_S bit (b0, STAT0,...) will be set. A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the LLOS_S bit (b0, STAT0,...) or any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the LLOS_S bit (b0, STAT0,...) will set the LLOS_IS bit (b0, INTS0,...) to ‘1’, as selected by the LOS_IES bit (b1, INTES,...). When the LLOS_IS bit (b0, INTS0,...) is ‘1’, an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the LLOS_IM bit (b0, INTM0,...). During LLOS, if any of AIS, pattern generation in the receive path or Digital Loopback is enabled, RDn, RDPn/RDNn and RCLKn output corresponding data and clock, and the setting of the RCKH bit (b7, RCF0,...) is ignored. Refer to the corresponding chapters for details. 1. XCLK is derived from MCLK. It is 1.544 MHz in T1/J1 mode or 2.048 MHz in E1 mode. Table-17 LLOS Criteria Operation Mode T1/J1 E1 LAC Criteria LLOS Declaring LLOS Clearing 0 ANSI T1.231 below Q Vpp, N = 175 bits above P Vpp, 12.5% mark density with less than 100 consecutive zeros, M = 175 bits 1 ANSI I.431 0 G.775 below Q Vpp, N = 32 bits above P Vpp, 12.5% mark density with less than 16 consecutive zeros, M = 32 bits 1 ETSI 300233/ I.431 below Q Vpp, N = 2048 bits above P Vpp, 12.5% mark density with less than 16 consecutive zeros, M = 32 bits below Q Vpp, N = 1544 bits above P Vpp, 12.5% mark density with less than 100 consecutive zeros, M = 175 bits One LLOS Indication Cycle 0 1 2 3 15 16 0 CLKE1 LLOS0 LLOS CH0 CH1 CH2 CH15 CH16 CH0 Figure-20 LLOS Indication on Pins Functional Description 39 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT In T1/J1 mode, SLOS detection supports ANSI T1.231 and I.431. In E1 mode, SLOS detection supports G.775 and ETSI 300233/I.431. The criteria are selected by the LAC bit (b7, LOS,...). 3.5.3.2 System LOS (SLOS) SLOS can only be detected when the transmit system interface is in Dual Rail NRZ Format mode or in Dual Rail RZ Format mode. When SLOS is detected, the SLOS_S bit (b1, STAT0,...) will be set. A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the SLOS_S bit (b1, STAT0,...) or any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the SLOS_S bit (b1, STAT0,...) will set the SLOS_IS bit (b1, INTS0,...) to ‘1’, as selected by the LOS_IES bit (b1, INTES,...). When the SLOS_IS bit (b1, INTS0,...) is ‘1’, an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the SLOS_IM bit (b1, INTM0,...). The amplitude and density of the data input from the transmit system side are monitored. When the input ‘0’s are equal to or more than N consecutive pulse intervals, SLOS is declared. When the average density of marks is at least 12.5% for M consecutive pulse intervals starting with a mark, SLOS is cleared. Here N and M are defined by the LAC bit (b7, LOS,...). Refer to Table-18 for details. SLOS may be counted by an internal Error Counter or may be indicated by the TMFn pin. Refer to Section 3.5.6 Error Counter and Section 3.5.7.2 TMFn Indication respectively. Table-18 SLOS Criteria Operation Mode T1/J1 E1 LAC Criteria SLOS Declaring 1 SLOS Clearing 1 0 ANSI T1.231 no pulse detected for N consecutive pulse intervals, N = 175 bits 12.5% mark density with less than 100 consecutive zeros for M consecutive pulse intervals, M = 175 bits 1 ANSI I.431 no pulse detected for N consecutive pulse intervals, N = 1544 bits 12.5% mark density with less than 100 consecutive zeros for M consecutive pulse intervals, M = 175 bits 0 G.775 no pulse detected for N consecutive pulse intervals, N = 32 bits 12.5% mark density with less than 16 consecutive zeros for M consecutive pulse intervals, M = 32 bits 1 ETSI 300233/ I.431 no pulse detected for N consecutive pulse intervals, N = 2048 bits 12.5% mark density with less than 16 consecutive zeros for M consecutive pulse intervals, M = 32 bits Note: 1. System input ports are schmitt-trigger inputs) Functional Description 40 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT transmit line side to ensure that at least one channel is in High-Z state. The middle two columns list the internal operation status. In the right two columns, the TLOS_S bit (b2, STAT0,...) of the two channels indicates the TLOS status in the transmit line side. 3.5.3.3 Transmit LOS (TLOS) The amplitude and density of the data output on the transmit line side are monitored. When the amplitude of the data is less than a certain voltage for a certain period, TLOS is declared. The voltage is defined by the TALOS[1:0] bits (b3~2, LOS,...). The period is defined by the TDLOS[1:0] bits (b1~0, LOS,...). When a valid pulse is detected, i.e., the amplitude is above the setting in the TALOS[1:0] bits (b3~2, LOS,...), TLOS is cleared. Channel #1 TTIPn TRINGn When TLOS is detected, the TLOS_S bit (b2, STAT0,...) will be set. A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the TLOS_S bit (b2, STAT0,...) or any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the TLOS_S bit (b2, STAT0,...) will set the TLOS_IS bit (b2, INTS0,...) to ‘1’, as selected by the TLOS_IES bit (b2, INTES,...). When the TLOS_IS bit (b2, INTS0,...) is ‘1’, an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the TLOS_IM bit (b2, INTM0,...). Line Driver TLOS Detector TLOS may be counted by an internal Error Counter or may be indicated by the TMFn pin. Refer to Section 3.5.6 Error Counter and Section 3.5.7.2 TMFn Indication respectively. TLOS Channel #2 TTIPn TRINGn TLOS can be used to monitor the LOS in the transmit line side between two channels. The connection between the two channels is shown in Figure-21. The two channels can be of the same device or different devices on the premises that the transmit line interfaces are in the same mode and at least the output of one channel is in High-Z state. Table-19 lists each results in this case. In the left two columns, the OE bit (b6, TCF0,...) of the two channels controls the output status in the Line Driver TLOS Detector TLOS Figure-21 TLOS Detection Between Two Channels Table-19 TLOS Detection Between Two Channels Output Status ~ Controlled By the OE Bit Internal Operation Status TLOS Status ~ Indicated By the TLOS_S Bit Channel #1 Channel #2 Channel #1 Channel #2 Channel #1 Channel #2 Normal ~ 1 High-Z ~ 0 Normal (don’t-care) No TLOS ~ 0 No TLOS ~ 0 Normal ~ 1 High-Z ~ 0 Failure Normal TLOS Detected ~ 1 * TLOS Detected ~ 1 High-Z ~ 0 Normal ~ 1 (don’t-care) Normal No TLOS ~ 0 No TLOS ~ 0 High-Z ~ 0 Normal ~ 1 Normal Failure TLOS Detected ~ 1 TLOS Detected ~ 1 * High-Z ~ 0 High-Z ~ 0 (don’t-care) (don’t-care) TLOS Detected ~ 1 TLOS Detected ~ 1 Note: * The TLOS_S bit (b2, STAT0,...) may not be set if there is any catastrophic failure in the channel. Functional Description 41 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 3.5.4 ALARM INDICATION SIGNAL (AIS) DETECTION AND GENERATION 3.5.4.1 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Detection AIS is monitored in both the receive path and the transmit path. When the mark density in the received data or in the data input from the transmit system side meets certain criteria, AIS is declared or cleared. In T1/J1 mode, the criteria are in compliance with ANSI T1.231. In E1 mode, the criteria are in compliance with ITU G.775 or ETSI 300233, as selected by the LAC bit (b7, LOS,...). Refer to Table-20 for details. Table-20 AIS Criteria ITU G.775 for E1 (LAC = 0) ETSI 300233 for E1 (LAC = 1) ANSI T1.231 for T1 (LAC = 0 or 1) AIS Declaring Less than 3 zeros are received in each of two Less than 3 zeros are received Less than 9 zeros are received in a 8192-bit stream, i.e., less consecutive 512-bit data streams. in a 512-bit data stream. than 99.9% of marks in a period of 5.3 ms are received. AIS Clearing 3 or more zeros are received in each of two 3 or more zeros are received in 9 or more zeros are received in a 8192-bit data stream. consecutive 512-bit data streams. a 512-bit data stream. When AIS is detected in the receive path, the LAIS_S bit (b6, STAT1,...) will be set. A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the LAIS_S bit (b6, STAT1,...) or any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the LAIS_S bit (b6, STAT1,...) will set the LAIS_IS bit (b6, INTS1,...) to ‘1’, as selected by the AIS_IES bit (b6, INTES,...). When the LAIS_IS bit (b6, INTS1,...) is ‘1’, an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the LAIS_IM bit (b6, INTM1,...). 3.5.4.2 (Alarm Indication Signal) AIS Generation AIS can be generated automatically in the receive path and the transmit path. In the receive path, when the ASAIS_LLOS bit (b2, AISG,...) is set, AIS will be generated automatically once LLOS is detected. When the ASAIS_SLOS bit (b3, AISG,...) is set, AIS will be generated automatically once SLOS is detected. When AIS is generated, RDn or RDPn/ RDNn output all ‘1’s. RCLKn (if available) outputs XCLK. When AIS is detected in the transmit path, the SAIS_S bit (b7, STAT1,...) will be set. A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the SAIS_S bit (b7, STAT1,...) or any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the SAIS_S bit (b7, STAT1,...) will set the SAIS_IS bit (b7, INTS1,...) to ‘1’, as selected by the AIS_IES bit (b6, INTES,...). When the SAIS_IS bit (b7, INTS1,...) is ‘1’, an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the SAIS_IM bit (b7, INTM1,...). In the transmit path, when the ALAIS_LLOS bit (b0, AISG,...) is set, AIS will be generated automatically once LLOS is detected. When the ALAIS_SLOS bit (b1, AISG,...) is set, AIS will be generated automatically once SLOS is detected. When AIS is generated, TTIPn/TRINGn output all ‘1’s. AIS generation uses XCLK1 as reference clock. AIS may be counted by an internal Error Counter or may be indicated by the RMFn or TMFn pin. Refer to Section 3.5.6 Error Counter and Section 3.5.7 Receive /Transmit Multiplex Function (RMF / TMF) Indication respectively. If pattern (including PRBS, ARB and IB) is generated in the same direction, the priority of pattern generation is higher. The generated pattern will overwrite automatic AIS. Refer to Section 3.5.5.1 Pattern Generation for the output data and clock. 1. XCLK is derived from MCLK. It is 1.544 MHz in T1/J1 mode or 2.048 MHz in E1 mode. Functional Description 42 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT • Set the PG_EN[1:0] bits (b5~4, PG,...) to generate the pattern. 3.5.5 PRBS, QRSS, ARB AND IB PATTERN GENERATION AND DETECTION If PRBS or ARB is selected to be generated, the following two steps can be optionally implemented after the pattern is generated: • Insert a single bit error by writing ‘1’ to the ERR_INS bit (b5, ERR,...); • Invert the generated pattern by setting the PAG_INV bit (b2, PG,...). The pattern includes: Pseudo Random Bit Sequence (PRBS), QuasiRandom Signal Source (QRSS), Arbitrary Pattern (ARB) and Inband Loopback (IB). 3.5.5.1 Pattern Generation The pattern can be generated in the receive path or the transmit path, as selected by the PG_POS bit (b3, PG,...). If pattern is generated in the receive path, the generated pattern should be encoded by using AMI or B8ZS (for T1/J1) / HDB3 (for E1) in Receive Dual Rail NRZ Format mode, Receive Dual Rail RZ Format mode and Receive Dual Rail Sliced mode. The encoding rule is selected by the R_CODE bit (b2, RCF1,...). The pattern to be generated is selected by the PG_EN[1:0] bits (b5~4, PG,...). If PRBS is selected, three kinds of PRBS patterns with maximum zero restriction according to ITU-T O.151 and AT&T TR62411 are provided. They are: (2^20 - 1) QRSS per O.150-4.5, (2^15 - 1) PRBS per O.152 and (2^11 - 1) PRBS per O.150, as selected by the PRBG_SEL[1:0] bits (b1~0, PG,...). If pattern is generated in the transmit path, the generated pattern should be encoded by using AMI or B8ZS (for T1/J1) / HDB3 (for E1). The encoding rule is selected by the T_CODE bit (b2, TCF1,...). The pattern generation is shown in Figure-22 and Figure-23. If ARB is selected, the content is programmed in the ARB[23:0] bits (b7~0, ARBH~ARBM~ARBL,...). PG_EN[1:0] If IB is selected, the IB generation is in compliance with ANSI T1.403. The length of the IB code can be 3 to 8 bits, as determined by the IBGL[1:0] bits (b5~4, IBL,...). The content is programmed in the IBG[7:0] bits (b7~0, IBG,...). XCLK PRBS/ARB/IB pattern generator The selected pattern is transmitted repeatedly until the PG_EN[1:0] bits (b5~4, PG,...) is set to ‘00’. TCLK/RCLK PG_POS When pattern is generated in the receive path, the reference clock is XCLK or the recovered clock from the received signal, as selected by the PG_CK bit (b6, PG,...). The selected reference clock is also output on RCLKn (if available). TDPn/TDNn/TCLKn TTIPn/TRINGn CHn RDPn/RDNn/RCLKn RTIPn/RRINGn When pattern is generated in the transmit path, the reference clock is XCLK1 or the transmit clock, as selected by the PG_CK bit (b6, PG,...). The transmit clock refers to the clock input on TCLKn (in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode and in Transmit Dual Rail NRZ Format mode) or the clock recovered from the data input on TDPn and TDNn (in Transmit Dual Rail RZ Format mode). Figure-22 Pattern Generation (1) PRBG_SEL[1:0] PG_EN[1:0] In summary, do the followings step by step to generate pattern: • Select the generation direction by the PG_POS bit (b3, PG,...); • Select the reference clock by the PG_CK bit (b6, PG,...); • Select the PRBS pattern by the PRBG_SEL[1:0] bits (b1~0, PG,...) when PRBS is to be generated; program the ARB pattern in the ARB[23:0] bits (b7~0, ARBH~ARBM~ARBL,...) when ARB is to be generated; or set the length and the content of the IB code in the IBGL[1:0] bits (b5~4, IBL,...) and in the IBG[7:0] bits (b7~0, IBG,...) respectively when IB is to be generated; PRBS generation 2^11-1 2^15-1 2^20-1 24 bits ARB ARB[23:0] ERR_INS PAG_INV Single bit error insert invert Figure-23 Pattern Generation (2) The priority of pattern generation is higher than that of AIS generation. If they are generated in the same direction, the generated pattern will overwrite the generated AIS. 1. XCLK is derived from MCLK. It is 1.544 MHz in T1/J1 mode or 2.048 MHz in E1 mode. Functional Description PG_CK 43 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 3.5.5.2 Pattern Detection from Rx path Decoding or Tx path Data received from the line side or data input from the transmit system side may be extracted for pattern detection. The direction of data extraction is determined by the PD_POS bit (b3, PD,...). One of PRBS or ARB pattern is selected for detection and IB detection is always active. Data Inversion Comparison PRBS ReGeneration If data is extracted from the receive path, before pattern detection the data should be decoded by using AMI or B8ZS (for T1/J1) / HDB3 (for E1). The decoding rule is selected by the R_CODE bit (b2, RCF1,...). ARB[23:0] Programming If data is extracted from the transmit path, before pattern detection the data should be decoded by using AMI or B8ZS (for T1/J1) / HDB3 (for E1) in Transmit Dual Rail NRZ Format mode and Transmit Dual Rail RZ Format mode. The decoding rule is selected by the T_CODE bit (b2, TCF1,...). Figure-24 PRBS / ARB Detection During comparison, if the extracted data coincides with the re-generated PRBS pattern or the programmed ARB pattern for more than 64-bit hopping window, the pattern is synchronized and the PA_S bit (b5, STAT1,...) will be set. Pseudo Random Bit Sequence (PRBS) /Arbitrary Pattern (ARB) Detection In synchronization state, if more than 6 PRBS/ARB errors are detected in a 64-bit hopping window, the pattern is out of synchronization and the PA_S bit (b5, STAT1,...) will be cleared. The extracted data can be optionally inverted by the PAD_INV bit (b2, PD,...) before PRBS/ARB detection. In synchronization state, each mismatched bit will generate a PRBS/ ARB error. When a PRBS/ARB error is detected during the synchronization, the ERR_IS bit (b1, INTS2,...) will be set and an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the ERR_IM bit (b1, INTM2,...). The PRBS/ARB error may be counted by an internal Error Counter. Refer to Section 3.5.6 Error Counter. The extracted data is used to compare with the desired pattern. The desired pattern is re-generated from the extracted data if the desired pattern is (2^20 - 1) QRSS per O.150-4.5, (2^15 - 1) PRBS per O.152 or (2^11 - 1) PRBS per O.150; or the desired pattern is programmed in the ARB[23:0] bits (b7~0, ARBH~ARBM~ARBL,...) if the desired pattern is ARB. The desired pattern is selected by the PAD_SEL[1:0] bits (b1~0, PD,...). A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the PA_S bit (b5, STAT1,...) or any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the PA_S bit (b5, STAT1,...) will set the PA_IS bit (b5, INTS1,...) to ‘1’, as selected by the PA_IES bit (b5, INTES,...). When the PA_IS bit (b5, INTS1,...) is ‘1’, an interrupt will be reported by INT if not masked by the PA_IM bit (b5, INTM1,...). In summary, do the followings step by step to detect PRBS/ARB: • Select the detection direction by the PD_POS bit (b3, PD,...); • Set the ARB[23:0] bits (b7~0, ARBH~ARBM~ARBL,...) if the ARB pattern is desired - this step is omitted if the PRBS pattern is desired; • Select the desired PRBS/ARB pattern by the PAD_SEL[1:0] bits (b1~0, PD,...). The PRBS/ARB synchronization status may be indicated by the RMFn or TMFn pin. Refer to Section 3.5.7 Receive /Transmit Multiplex Function (RMF / TMF) Indication. The priority of decoding, data inversion, pattern re-generation, bit programming and pattern comparison is shown in Figure-24. Functional Description 44 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT respectively, as selected by the IB_IES bit (b0, INTES,...). When the IBA_IS/IBD_IS bit (b1/b0, INTS1,...) is ‘1’, an interrupt will be reported on INT if not masked by the IBA_IM/IBD_IM bit (b1/b0, INTM1,...). Inband Loopback (IB) Detection The IB detection is in compliance with ANSI T1.403. The extracted data is used to compare with the target IB code. The length of the target activate/deactivate IB code can be 3 to 8 bits, as determined by the IBAL[1:0]/IBDL[1:0] bits (b3~2/b1~0, IBL,...). The content of the target activate/deactivate IB code is programmed in the IBA[7:0]/IBD[7:0] bits (b7~0, IBDA/IBDD,...). Refer to Figure-25. from Rx path Decoding or Tx path 3.5.6 ERROR COUNTER An internal 16-bit Error Counter is used to count one of the following errors: • LBPV: BPV/CV detected in the receive path (line side); • LEXZ: EXZ detected in the receive path (line side); • LBPV + LEXZ: BPV/CV and EXZ detected in the receive path (line side); • SBPV: BPV/CV detected in the transmit path (system side) (disabled in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode); • SEXZ: EXZ detected in the transmit path (system side); • SBPV + SEXZ: BPV/CV and EXZ detected in the transmit path (system side) (disabled in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode); • PRBS/ARB error. Comparison Target code length & content programming Figure-25 IB Detection During comparison, if the extracted data coincides with the target activate/deactivate IB code with no more than 10-2 bit error rate for a certain period, the IB code is detected. The period depends on the setting of the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...). The CNT_SEL[2:0] bits (b4~2, ERR,...) select one of the above errors to be counted. If the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...) is ‘0’, Automatic Digital/Remote Loopback is disabled. In this case, when the activate IB code is detected for more than 40 ms, the IBA_S bit (b1, STAT1,...) will be set to indicate the activate IB code detection; when the deactivate IB code is detected for more than 40 ms (T1/J1 mode) / 30 ms (E1 mode), the IBD_S bit (b0, STAT1,...) will be set to indicate the deactivate IB code detection. The Error Counter is accessed by reading the ERRCH and ERRCL registers. If the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...) is ‘1’, Automatic Digital/Remote Loopback is enabled. In this case, when the activate IB code is detected for more than 5.1 seconds, the IBA_S bit (b1, STAT1,...) will be set to indicate the activate IB code detection. The detection of the activate IB code in the receive path will activate Remote Loopback or the detection of the activate IB code in the transmit path will activate Digital Loopback (refer to Section 3.5.8.2 Remote Loopback & Section 3.5.8.3 Digital Loopback). When the deactivate IB code is detected for more than 5.1 seconds, the IBD_S bit (b0, STAT1,...) will be set to indicate the deactivate IB code detection. The detection of the deactivate IB code in the receive path will deactivate Remote Loopback or the detection of the deactivate IB code in the transmit path will deactivate Digital Loopback (refer to Section 3.5.8.2 Remote Loopback & Section 3.5.8.3 Digital Loopback). The one-second timer uses MCLK as clock reference. The expiration of each one second will set the TMOV_IS bit (b0, INTTM) and induce an interrupt reported by INT if not masked by the TMOV_IM bit (b0, GCF). The Error Counter is buffered. It is updated automatically or manually, as determined by the CNT_MD bit (b1, ERR,...). 3.5.6.1 Automatic Error Counter Updating When the CNT_MD bit (b1, ERR,...) is ‘1’, the Error Counter is updated every one second automatically. When each one second expires, the Error Counter transfers the accumulated error numbers to the ERRCH and ERRCL registers and the Error Counter will be cleared to start a new round counting. The ERRCH and ERRCL registers should be read in the next second, otherwise they will be overwritten. When the ERRCH and ERRCL registers are all ‘1’s and there is still error to be accumulated, the registers will be overflowed. The overflow is indicated by the CNTOV_IS bit (b0, INTS2,...) and will induce an interrupt reported by INT if not masked by the CNTOV_IM (b0, INTM2,...). The process of automatic Error Counter updating is illustrated in Figure-26. A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the IBA_S/IBD_S bit (b1/b0, STAT1,...) or any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the IBA_S/IBD_S bit (b1/b0, STAT1,...) will set the IBA_IS/IBD_IS bit (b1/b0, INTS1,...) to ‘1’ Functional Description 45 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 3.5.6.2 Manual Error Counter Updating Automatic Error Counter Updating (CNT_MD = 1) When the CNT_MD bit (b1, ERR,...) is ‘0’, the Error Counter is updated manually. When there is a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the CNT_STOP bit (b0, ERR,...), the Error Counter transfers the accumulated error numbers to the ERRCH and ERRCL registers and the Error Counter will be cleared to start a new round counting. The ERRCH and ERRCL registers should be read in the next round of error counting, otherwise they will be overwritten. Counting No One second expired? (TMOV_IS = 1 ?) Yes When the ERRCH and ERRCL registers are all ‘1’s and there is still error to be accumulated, the registers will be overflowed. The overflow is indicated by the CNTOV_IS bit (b0, INTS2,...) and will induce an interrupt reported by INT if not masked by the CNTOV_IM (b0, INTM2,...). repeat the same process in the next second The process of manual Error Counter updating is illustrated in Figure-27. Data in the Error Counter transfers to the ERRCH & ERRCL registers The Error Counter is cleared TMOV_IS is cleared after a '1' is written to it Manual Error Counter Updating (CNT_MD = 0) Read the ERRCH & ERRCL registers in the next second Counting No Figure-26 Automatic Error Counter Updating A transition from '0' to '1' on CNT_STOP ? Yes Data in the Error Counter transfers to the ERRCH & ERRCL registers The Error Counter is cleared repeat the same process in the next round (CNT_STOP must be cleared before the next round) Read the ERRCH & ERRCL registers in the next round Figure-27 Manual Error Counter Updating Functional Description 46 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT RMFn can indicate the status of PRBS/ARB, LAIS, LEXZ, LBPV, LEXZ + LBPV, LLOS, output recovered clock (RCLK) or XOR output of positive and negative sliced data, as selected by the RMF_DEF[2:0] bits (b7~5, RCF1,...). Refer to Table-21 for details. 3.5.7 RECEIVE /TRANSMIT MULTIPLEX FUNCTION (RMF / TMF) INDICATION 3.5.7.1 RMFn Indication In Receive Single Rail NRZ Format mode, the RDNn/RMFn pin is used as RMFn. In Receive Dual Rail Sliced mode, the RCLKn/RMFn pin is used as RMFn. Refer to Table-3 Multiplex Pin Used in Receive System Interface for details. Table-21 RMFn Indication RMF_DEF[2:0] Indication On RMF Details 000 PRBS/ARB RMFn is high if PRBS/ARB is detected in synchronization in the receive path. During the synchronization, RMFn goes low for a T1/E1 clock cycle if a PRBS/ARB error is detected. RMFn is low if PRBS/ARB is out of synchronization. Refer to Section 3.5.5 PRBS, QRSS, ARB and IB Pattern Generation and Detection. 001 Line Alarm Indication Signal (LAIS) RMFn is high if AIS is detected in the receive path and low if it is cleared. This indication corresponds to the LAIS_S bit (b6, STAT1,...). Refer to Section 3.5.4 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Detection and Generation. 010 XOR result of positive RMFn outputs XOR data of positive and negative sliced data. and negative sliced data 011 recovered clock (RCLK) RMFn outputs the recovered clock as RCLKn. All the description about RCLKn is applicable for RMFn. 100 Line Excessive Zeroes (LEXZ) RMFn goes high for a T1/E1 clock cycle if an EXZ is detected in the receive path, otherwise it is low. Refer to Section 3.5.2 Excessive Zeroes (EXZ) Detection. 101 Line Bipolar Violation (LBPV) RMFn goes high for a T1/E1 clock cycle if a BPV/CV is detected in the receive path, otherwise it is low. Refer to Section 3.5.1 Bipolar Violation (BPV) / Code Violation (CV) Detection and BPV Insertion. 110 LEXZ + LBPV 111 Line Loss of Signal (LLOS) Functional Description RMFn goes high for a T1/E1 clock cycle if an EXZ or a BPV/CV is detected in the receive path, otherwise it is low. RMFn is high if LOS is detected in the receive path and low if it is cleared. This indication corresponds to the LLOS_S bit (b0, STAT0,...). Refer to Section 3.5.3.1 Line LOS (LLOS). 47 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT TMFn can indicate the status of PRBS/ARB, SAIS, TOC, TLOS, SEXZ, SBPV, SEXZ + SBPV or SLOS, as selected by the TMF_DEF[2:0] bits (b7~5, TCF1,...). However, the indication of SBPV, SEXZ + SBPV and SLOS is disabled automatically in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode. Refer to Table-22 for details. 3.5.7.2 TMFn Indication In Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode and Transmit Dual Rail RZ Format mode, the TDNn/TMFn pin is used as TMFn. Refer to Table-4 Multiplex Pin Used in Transmit System Interface for details. Table-22 TMFn Indication TMF_DEF[2:0] Indication On TMF Details 000 PRBS/ARB TMFn is high if PRBS/ARB is detected in synchronization in the transmit path. During the synchronization, TMFn goes low for a T1/E1 clock cycle if a PRBS/ARB error is detected. TMFn is low if PRBS/ARB is out of synchronization. 001 System Alarm Indication Signal (SAIS) TMFn is high if AIS is detected in the transmit path and low if it is cleared. This indication corresponds to the SAIS_S bit (b7, STAT1,...). Refer to Section 3.5.4 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Detection and Generation. 010 Transmit Over Current (TOC) TMFn is high if transmit over current is detected and low if it is cleared. This indication corresponds to the TOC_S bit (b4, STAT0,...). Refer to Section 3.3.5.1 Transmit Over Current Protection. 011 Transmit Loss of Signal (TLOS) TMFn is high if LOS is detected in the transmit line side and low if it is cleared. This indication corresponds to the TLOS_S bit (b2, STAT0,...). Refer to Section 3.5.3.3 Transmit LOS (TLOS). 100 System Excessive Zeroes (SEXZ) TMFn goes high for a T1/E1 clock cycle if an EXZ is detected in the transmit path, otherwise it is low. Refer to Section 3.5.2 Excessive Zeroes (EXZ) Detection 101 System Bipolar Violation (SBPV) * TMFn goes high for a T1/E1 clock cycle if a BPV/CV is detected in the transmit path, otherwise it is low. Refer to Section 3.5.1 Bipolar Violation (BPV) / Code Violation (CV) Detection and BPV Insertion. 110 System Excessive Zeroes (SEXZ) + System Bipolar Violation (SBPV) * TMFn goes high for a T1/E1 clock cycle if an EXZ or a BPV/CV is detected in the transmit path, otherwise it is low. 111 System Loss of Signal (SLOS) * TMFn is high if LOS is detected in the transmit system side and low if it is cleared. This indication corresponds to the SLOS_S bit (b1, STAT0,...). Refer to Section 3.5.3.2 System LOS (SLOS). Note: * In Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode, the corresponding indication is disabled and the corresponding setting is reserved. Functional Description 48 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.5.8 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT In Analog Loopback mode, the data stream to be transmitted is still output to the line side, while the data stream received from the line side is covered by the Analog Loopback data. LOOPBACK There are four kinds of loopback: • Analog Loopback • Remote Loopback • Digital Loopback • Dual Loopback Anytime when Analog Loopback is set, the other loopbacks (i.e., Digital Loopback and Remote Loopback) are disabled. In Analog Loopback, the priority of the diagnostic facilities in the receive path is: pattern generation > looped data. AIS generation is disabled in both the receive path and the transmit path. Refer to Figure28. Refer to Figure-1 for loopback location. 3.5.8.1 Analog Loopback Analog Loopback is enabled by the ALP bit (b0, LOOP,...). The data stream to be transmitted on the TTIPn/TRINGn pins is internally looped to the RTIPn/RRINGn pins. LLOS detection BPV/CV, EXZ, AIS, pattern detection AIS generation X Pattern generation Rx path Analog Loopback Tx path X AIS generation Pattern generation BPV/CV, EXZ, SLOS, AIS, pattern detection Figure-28 Priority Of Diagnostic Facilities During Analog Loopback Functional Description 49 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Remote Loopback. The setting of the PD_POS bit (b3, PD,...) should not be changed during automatic Remote Loopback. The AUTOLP_S bit (b7, STAT0,...) indicates the automatic Remote Loopback status. 3.5.8.2 Remote Loopback Remote Loopback can be configured manually or automatically. Either manual Remote Loopback configuration or automatic Remote Loopback configuration will enable Remote Loopback. In Remote Loopback mode, the data stream output from the RJA (if enabled) is internally looped to the Waveform Shaper. The data stream received from the line side is still output to the system side, while the data stream input from the system side is covered by the Remote Loopback data and the status on TCLKn does not affect the Remote Loopback. However, the BPV/CV, EXZ, SLOS, AIS and pattern detection in the transmit path still monitors the data stream input from the system side. Manual Remote Loopback is enabled by the RLP bit (b1, LOOP,...). Automatic Remote Loopback is enabled when the pattern detection is assigned in the receive path (i.e., the PD_POS bit (b3, PD,...) is ‘0’) and the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...) is ‘1’. The corresponding channel will enter Remote Loopback when the activate IB code is detected in the receive path for more than 5.1 sec.; and will return from Remote Loopback when the deactivate IB code is detected in the receive path for more than 5.1 sec. Refer to section Inband Loopback (IB) Detection on page 45 for details. When automatic Remote Loopback is active, setting the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...) back to ‘0’ will also stop automatic LLOS, AIS detection In Remote Loopback mode, the priority of the diagnostic facilities in the receive path is: pattern generation > AIS generation; the priority of the diagnostic facilities in the transmit path is: pattern generation > looped data. AIS generation is disabled in the transmit path. Refer to Figure-29. AIS generation BPV/CV, EXZ, pattern detection Pattern generation Rx path Remote Loopback X AIS generation Tx path BPV/CV, EXZ, SLOS, AIS, pattern detection Pattern generation Figure-29 Priority Of Diagnostic Facilities During Manual Remote Loopback Functional Description 50 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Loopback. The setting of the PD_POS bit (b3, PD,...) should not be changed during automatic Digital Loopback. The AUTOLP_S bit (b7, STAT0,...) indicates the automatic Digital Loopback status. 3.5.8.3 Digital Loopback The Digital Loopback can be configured manually or automatically. Either manual Digital Loopback configuration or automatic Digital Loopback configuration will enable Digital Loopback. In Digital Loopback mode, the data stream output from the TJA (if enabled) is internally looped to the Decoder (if enabled). The data stream to be transmitted is still output to the line side, while the data stream received from the line side is covered by the Digital Loopback data. However, LLOS and AIS detection in the receive path still monitors the data stream received from the line side. Manual Digital Loopback is enabled by the DLP bit (b2, LOOP,...). Automatic Digital Loopback is enabled when the pattern detection is assigned in the transmit path (i.e., the PD_POS bit (b3, PD,...) is ‘1’) and the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...) is ‘1’. The corresponding channel will enter Digital Loopback when the activate IB code is detected in the transmit path for more than 5.1 sec.; and will return from Digital Loopback when the deactivate IB code is detected in the transmit path for more than 5.1 sec. Refer to section Inband Loopback (IB) Detection on page 45 for details. When automatic Digital Loopback is active, setting the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...) back to ‘0’ will also stop automatic Digital LLOS, AIS detection In Digital Loopback mode, the priority of the diagnostic facilities in the receive path is: pattern generation > looped data; the priority of the diagnostic facilities in the transmit path is: pattern generation > looped data > AIS generation. AIS generation is disabled in the receive path. BPV/CV, EXZ, AIS, pattern detection AIS generation X Pattern generation Rx path Digital Loopback AIS generation Tx path Pattern generation BPV/CV, EXZ, SLOS, AIS, pattern detection Figure-30 Priority Of Diagnostic Facilities During Digital Loopback Functional Description 51 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 3.5.8.4 Dual Loopback Manual Remote Loopback + Automatic Digital Loopback Dual Loopback refers to the simultaneous implementation of Remote Loopback and Digital Loopback. Two kinds of combinations are supported: • Manual Remote Loopback + Manual Digital Loopback; • Manual Remote Loopback + Automatic Digital Loopback. This combination of Dual Loopback is enabled when both manual Remote Loopback and automatic Digital Loopback are enabled. Manual Remote Loopback is enabled by the RLP bit (b1, LOOP,...). Automatic Digital Loopback is enabled when the pattern detection is assigned in the transmit path (i.e., the PD_POS bit (b3, PD,...) is ‘1’) and the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...) is ‘1’. The corresponding channel will enter Digital Loopback when the activate IB code is detected in the transmit path for more than 5.1 sec.; and will return from Digital Loopback when the deactivate IB code is detected in the transmit path for more than 5.1 sec. Refer to section Inband Loopback (IB) Detection on page 45 for details. When automatic Digital Loopback is active, setting the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...) back to ‘0’ will also stop automatic Digital Loopback. The setting of the PD_POS bit (b3, PD,...) should not be changed during automatic Digital Loopback. The AUTOLP_S bit (b7, STAT0,...) indicates the automatic Digital Loopback status. Note that when Digital Loopback is active, automatic Remote Loopback is unavailable as the pattern detection is within the digital loop. In Dual Loopback mode, the data stream received from the line side outputs from the RJA (if enabled), loops to the Waveform Shaper internally and does not output to the system side. The data stream to be transmitted from the system side outputs from the TJA (if enabled), loops to the Decoder (if enabled) internally and does not output to the line side. LLOS, AIS detection in the receive path monitors the data stream received from the line side. The BPV/CV, EXZ and pattern detection in the receive path monitors the digital looped data. The BPV/CV, EXZ, SLOS, AIS and pattern detection in the transmit path monitors the data stream input from the system side. In this condition, the priority of the diagnostic facilities in the receive path is: pattern generation > digital looped data. AIS generation in both the receive path and the transmit path, the pattern generation in the transmit path are disabled. Manual Remote Loopback + Manual Digital Loopback This combination of Dual Loopback is enabled when both manual Remote Loopback and manual Digital Loopback are enabled. Manual Remote Loopback is enabled by the RLP bit (b1, LOOP,...). Manual Digital Loopback is enabled by the DLP bit (b2, LOOP,...). Refer to Figure-32. In this condition, the priority of the diagnostic facilities in the receive path is: pattern generation > digital looped data; the priority of the diagnostic facilities in the transmit path is: remote looped data > pattern generation. AIS generation is disabled in both the receive path and the transmit path. Refer to Figure-31. Functional Description 52 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT LLOS, AIS detection BPV/CV, EXZ, pattern detection AIS generation X Remote Loopback Pattern generation Rx path Digital Loopback Tx path X AIS generation Pattern generation BPV/CV, EXZ, SLOS, AIS, pattern detection Figure-31 Priority Of Diagnostic Facilities During Manual Remote Loopback + Manual Digital Loopback LLOS, AIS detection X Remote Loopback X AIS generation BPV/CV, EXZ, pattern detection AIS generation Pattern generation Rx path Digital Loopback Tx path X Pattern generation BPV/CV, EXZ, SLOS, AIS, pattern detection Figure-32 Priority Of Diagnostic Facilities During Manual Remote Loopback + Automatic Digital Loopback Functional Description 53 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.5.9 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Once the G.772 Monitoring is implemented, the receiver of channel 0 switches to External Impedance Matching mode automatically, and the setting in the R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) of channel 0 is ignored. CHANNEL 0 MONITORING Channel 0 is a special channel. It can be used in normal operation as the other 16 channels, or it can be used as a monitoring channel. Channel 0 supports G.772 Monitoring and Jitter Measurement. During the G.772 Monitoring, channel 0 processes as normal after data is received from the selected path and the operation of the monitored path is not effected. 3.5.9.1 G.772 Monitoring Selected by the MON[5:0] bits (b5~0, MON), any receiver or transmitter of the other 16 channels can be monitored by channel 0 (as shown in Figure-33). The signal which is monitored goes through the Clock & Data Recovery of monitoring channel (channel 0). The monitored clock can output on RCLK0. The monitored data can be observed digitally on the output pin of RCLK0, RD0/RDP0 and RDN0. LOS detector is still in use in channel 0 for the monitored signal. When the G.772 Monitoring is implemented (the MON[5:0] bits (b5~0, MON) is not ‘0’), the registers of the receiver of channel 0 should be the same as those of the selected receiver /transmitter except the line interface related registers. In monitoring mode, channel 0 can be configured to Remote Loopback. The signal which is being monitored will output on TTIP0 and TRING0. The output signal can then be connected to a standard test equipment for non-intrusive monitoring. RTIPn RRINGn Any of the Remaining Channels TTIPn TRINGn RDn/RDPn RDNn/RMFn RCLKn/RMFn TCLKn/TDNn TDNn/TMFn TDn/TDPn G.772 Monitoring RD0/RDP0 RDN0/RMF0 RCLK0/RMF0 RTIP0 RRING0 CH 0 TTIP0 TRING0 TCLK0/TDN0 TDN0/TMF0 TD0/TDP0 Figure-33 G.772 Monitoring Functional Description 54 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 3.5.9.2 Jitter Measurement (JM) Automatic JM Updating (JM_MD = 1) The RJA of channel 0 consists of a Jitter Measurement (JM) module. When the RJA is enabled in channel 0, the JM is used to measure the positive and negative peak value of the demodulated jitter signal of the received data stream. The bandwidth of the measured jitter is selected by the JM_BW bit (b0, JM). Peak jitter measurement No The greatest positive peak value monitored in a certain period is indicated by the JIT_PH and JIT_PL registers, while the greatest negative peak value monitored in the same period is indicated by the JIT_NH and JIT_NL registers. The relationship between the greatest positive /negative peak value and the indication in the corresponding registers is: One second expired? (TMOV_IS = 1 ?) repeat the same process in the next second Yes Positive Peak = [JIT_PH, JIT_PL] / 16 (UIpp); The greatest peak value in the internal buffers transfers to the JIT_PH & JIT_PL / JIT_NH & JIT_NL registers respectively The internal buffers are cleared Negative Peak = [JIT_NH, JIT_NL] / 16 (UIpp). The period is determined by the JM_MD bit (b1, JM). When the JM_MD bit (b1, JM) is ‘1’, the period is one second automatically. The one-second timer uses MCLK as clock reference. The expiration of each one second will set the TMOV_IS bit (b0, INTTM) and induce an interrupt reported by INT if not masked by the TMOV_IM bit (b0, GCF). The TMOV_IS bit (b0, INTTM) is cleared after a ‘1’ is written to this bit. When each one second expires, internal buffers transfer the greatest positive/negative peak value accumulated in this one second to the JIT_PH and JIT_PL / JIT_NH and JIT_NL registers respectively and the internal buffers will be cleared to start a new round measurement. The registers should be read in the next second, otherwise they will be overwritten. Refer to Figure-34 for the process. TMOV_IS is cleared after a '1' is written to it Read the JIT_PH, JIT_PL & JIT_NH, JIT_NL registers in the next second Figure-34 Automatic JM Updating Manual JM Updating (JM_MD = 0) When the JM_MD bit (b1, JM) is ‘0’, the period is controlled by the JM_STOP bit (b2, JM) manually. When there is a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the JM_STOP bit (b2, JM), the internal buffers transfer the greatest positive/negative peak value accumulated in this period to the JIT_PH and JIT_PL / JIT_NH and JIT_NL registers respectively and the internal buffers will be cleared to start a new round measurement. The registers should be read in the next round of jitter measurement, otherwise they will be overwritten. Refer to Figure-35 for the process. No Peak jitter measurement A transition from '0' to '1' on JM_STOP ? Yes The greatest peak value in the internal buffers transfers to the JIT_PH & JIT_PL / JIT_NH & JIT_NL registers respectively The internal buffers are cleared repeat the same process in the next round (JM_STOP must be cleared before the next round) Read the JIT_PH, JIT_PL & JIT_NH, JIT_NL registers in the next round Figure-35 Manual JM Updating Functional Description 55 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.6 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT CLOCK INPUTS AND OUTPUTS The outputs on CLKT1 and CLKE1 are free running (locking to MCLK). The output of CLKT1 is determined by the CLKT1_EN bit (b1, CLKG) and the CLKT1 bit (b0, CLKG). Refer to Table-23. The output of CLKE1 is determined by the CLKE1_EN bit (b3, CLKG) and the CLKE1 bit (b2, CLKG). Refer to Table-24. The IDT82P2816 provides two kinds of clock outputs: • Free running clock outputs on CLKT1 and CLKE1 • Receiver clock outputs on REFA and REFB - selected from any of the 17 recovered line clocks - driven by MCLK (free running) - driven by external CLKA/CLKB input Table-23 Clock Output on CLKT1 Control Bits A Frequency Synthesizer is also available to scale REFA to 8 different frequencies. Clock Output On CLKT1 The following Clock Inputs are provided: • MCLK as programmable reference timing for the IDT82P2816. • CLKA and CLKB as optional input clock source for REFA and REFB respectively 3.6.1 CLKT1_EN CLKT1 0 (don’t-care) High-Z 0 8 KHz 1 1.544 KHz 1 FREE RUNNING CLOCK OUTPUTS ON CLKT1/CLKE1 Table-24 Clock Output on CLKE1 An internal clock generator uses MCLK as reference to generate all the clocks required by internal circuits and CLKT1/CLKE1 outputs. MCLK should be a clock with +/-32 ppm (in T1/J1 mode) or +/-50 ppm (in E1 mode) accuracy. The clock frequency of MCLK is 1.544/2.048 X N MHz (1 ≤ N ≤ 8, N is an integer number), as determined by MCKSEL[3:0]. Refer to Chapter 2 Pin Description for details. Control Bits Clock Output On CLKE1 CLKE1_EN CLKE1 0 (don’t-care) High-Z 0 8 KHz 1 2.048 KHz 1 Functional Description 56 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.6.2 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT CLKA and CLKB are an external T1/J1 (1.544 MHZ) or E1 (2.048 MHz) Clock Input. The CKA_T1E1 bit (b5, REFA) and CKB_T1E1 bit (b5, REFB) should be set to match the input clock frequency. CLOCK OUTPUTS ON REFA/REFB The outputs on REFA and REFB can be enabled or disabled, as determined by the REFA_EN bit (b6, REFA) and the REFB_EN bit (b6, REFB) respectively. Determined by the FS_BYPASS bit (b4, REFCF), a Frequency Synthesizer can be enabled for REFA (refer to Section 3.6.2.2 Frequency Synthesizer for REFA Clock Output). If the Frequency Synthesizer is disabled, REFA will output the 1.544 MHz (T1) or 2.048 MHz (E1) clock depending the CLKA input clock. REFB will output 1.544 MHz (T1) or 2.048 MHz (E1) depending on the CLKB input clock. When the output is disabled, REFA/REFB is in High-Z state. When the output is enabled, the output of REFA and REFB varies in different operations. Refer to below for detailed description. Refer to Figure-36 and Figure-37 for an overview of REFA and REFB output options in normal operation. 3.6.2.5 REFA and REFB in Loss of Signal (LOS) or Loss of Clock Condition 3.6.2.1 REFA/REFB in Clock Recovery Mode In this mode (default), the clock of REFA and REFB is derived from the recovered clock of one of the 17 channels as selected by the REFA[4:0] bits (b4~0,REFA) and REFB[4:0] bits (b4~0,REFB). Determined by the FS_BYPAS bit (b4, REFCF) a Frequency Synthesizer can be enabled for REFA (refer to Section 3.6.2.2 Frequency Synthesizer for REFA Clock Output). If the Frequency Synthesizer is disabled, REFA will output the recovered 1.544 MHz (T1) or 2.048 MHz (E1) clock depending on the line mode of the selected channel. REFB output the recovered 1.544 MHz (T1) or 2.048 MHz (E1) clock depending on the line mode of the selected channel. If the recovered clock of one of the 17 channels is selected as the clock source for REFA and REFB (refer to Section 3.6.2.1 REFA/REFB in Clock Recovery Mode) and Line LOS (LLOS) is detected in the corresponding channel, the state of output on REFA and REFB can be selected by the REFH bit (b5, REFCF). If REFH is set to ‘1’, REFA and REFB will output a high level in case of LLOS. If REFH is set to ‘0’ and LLOS is detected, REFA and REFB clock outputs will be locked to MCLK while the selected clock frequency will remain unchanged. LLOS condition is set when LLOS_S bit (b0, STAT0) is ‘1’. Refer to Section 3.5.3.1 Line LOS (LLOS). The recovered line clock can be output to REFA and REFB before or after it passed the receive Jitter Attenuator (RJA) selected by the JA_BYPAS bit (b6, REFCF). Refer to Figure-38 for a detailed overview of REFA output in case of LLOS. REFB output option is only determined by the REFH bit (b5, REFCF) to be locked to MCLK or set to high level output. 3.6.2.2 Frequency Synthesizer for REFA Clock Output If CLKA is selected as the clock source for REFA (refer to Section 3.6.2.4 REFA/REFB Driven by External CLKA/CLKB Input) and there is no clock input on CLKA for more than 8 T1 clock cycles if T1 mode is selected (i.e. CKA_T1E1 bit (b5, REFA) is ‘0’) or more than 8 E1 clock cycles if E1 mode is selected (i.e. CKA_T1E1 bit (b5, REFA) is ‘1’), the state of the REFA output is determined by the FS_BYPAS bit (b4, REFCF) and the FREE bit (b3, REFCF). In case the Frequency Synthesizer is disabled (i.e. FS_BYPAS bit (b4, REFCF) is ‘0’). REFA will output a high level. If the Frequency Synthesizer is enabled and the FREE bit (b3, REFCF) is set to ‘0’, REFA will output a high level. If the Frequency Synthesizer is enabled and the FREE bit (b3, REFCF) is set to ‘1’, REFA will be locked to MCLK. For REFA a Frequency Synthesizer can be enabled or bypassed (default) as selected by FS_BYPASS bit (b4, REFCF). The output frequency is selected by the FREQ[2:0] bits (b2~0, REFCF). Frequencies supported are 8 KHz, 64 KHz, 2.048 MHz, 4.096 MHz, 8.192 MHz, 19.44 MHz or 32.768 MHz. 3.6.2.3 Free Run Mode for REFA Clock Output REFA can also be selected to provide a free running clock locked to MCLK. To enable this mode the Frequency Synthesizer has to be enabled by setting the FS_BYPAS bit (b4, REFCF) to ‘0’, and the FREE bit (b3, REFCF) has to be set to ‘1’. REFA will provide a frequency selected by the FREQ[2:0]1 bits (b2~0, REFCF) which is a free running clock locked to MCLK. Refer to Figure-39 for a detailed overview of REFA output in case of loss of CLKA. 3.6.2.4 REFA/REFB Driven by External CLKA/CLKB Input If CLKB is selected as the clock source for REFB (refer to section Section 3.6.2.4 REFA/REFB Driven by External CLKA/CLKB Input) and there is no clock input on CLKB for more than 8 T1 clock cycles if T1 mode is selected (i.e. CKB_T1E1 bit (b5, REFB) is ‘0’) or more than 8 E1 clock cycles if E1 mode is selected (i.e. CKB_T1E1 bit (b5, REFB) is ‘1’), the output on REFB is determined by the REFH bit (b5, REFCF). If REFH is set to ‘1’, REFB will output a high level. If REFH is set to ‘0’, the REFB clock output will be locked to MCLK. In this mode, the clock of REFA and REFB is driven from an external clock input of CLKA and CLKB respectively. CLKA and CLKB are selected as an input source by setting REFA[4:0] bits (b4~0, REFA) and REFB[4:0] bits (b4~0, REFB) to any value from ‘11101’ to ‘11111’. 1. ‘000’ and ‘011’ are reserved for FREQ[2:0] in this mode. Functional Description 57 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Recovered clock of one of the 17 channels CLKA input JA_BYPAS = 1 ? Yes No Clock is derived from the output of RJA Clock is derived from the output of Rx Clock & Data Recovery selected by REFA[4:0] Yes FS_BYPAS = 1 ? No Pass through a Frequency Synthesizer FREE = 1 ? No Yes Output the selected clock on REFA Output on REFA is free running (locked to MCLK). The frequency is programmed in FREQ[2:0] *. Output on REFA is locked to the selected clock source. The frequency is programmed in FREQ[2:0]. Note *: '000' and '011' are reserved for FREQ[2:0] when REFA is free running. Figure-36 REFA Output Options in Normal Operation Functional Description 58 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Recovered clock of one of the 17 channels JA_BYPAS = 1 ? CLKB input Yes No Clock is derived from the output of RJA Clock is derived from the output of Rx Clock & Data Recovery selected by REFB[4:0] Output on REFB Figure-37 REFB Output Options in Normal Operation In LLOS condition. FS_BYPAS = 1 ? Yes No Pass through a Frequency Synthesizer. Yes FREE = 1 ? Yes REFH = 1 ? No No REFH = 1 ? No Yes Output on REFA is free running (locked to MCLK). The frequency is programmed in FREQ[2:0] *. Output high level. Output on REFA is free running (locked to MCLK). The frequency is 1.544 MHz in T1 mode or 2.048 MHz in E1 mode. Note *: '000' and '011' are reserved for FREQ[2:0] when REFA is free running. Figure-38 REFA Output in LLOS Condition (When RCLKn Is Selected) Functional Description 59 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT No clock input on CLKA. FS_BYPAS = 1 ? Yes No Pass through a Frequency Synthesizer. Yes FREE = 1 ? No Output on REFA is free running (locked to MCLK). The frequency is programmed in FREQ[2:0] *. Output high level. Note *: '000' and '011' are reserved for FREQ[2:0] when REFA is free running. Figure-39 REFA Output in No CLKA Condition (When CLKA Is Selected) Functional Description 60 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.6.3 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT MCLK, MASTER CLOCK INPUT transmit system interface is ignored and the output on the transmit system interface will be in High-Z state. Refer to Section 3.2.7 Receiver Power Down and Section 3.3.7 Transmitter Power Down for details. MCLK provides a stable reference timing for the IDT82P2816. MCLK should be a clock with +/-32 ppm (in T1/J1 mode) or +/-50 ppm (in E1 mode) accuracy. The clock frequency of MCLK is set by pins MCKSEL[3:0] and can be N x 1.544 MHz or N x 2.048 MHz with 1 ≤ N ≤ 8 (N is an integer number). Refer to MCKSEL[3:0] pin description for details. If MCLK recovers after loss of MCLK the device will be reset automatically. 3.6.4 XCLK is derived from MCLK. For the respective channel, it is 1.544 MHz in T1/J1 mode or 2.048 MHz in E1 mode. XCLK is used as selectable reference clock for • pattern /AIS generation • RCLKn in LLOS • Loss of TCLKn to determine Transmit Output High-Z. If there is a loss of MCLK (duty cycle is less than 30% for 10 µs), the device will enter power down. In this case, both the receive and transmit circuits are turned off. The pins on the line interface will be in High-Z state. The pins on receive system interface will be in High-Z state or in low level, as selected by the RHZ bit (b6, RCF0,...). The input on the Functional Description XCLK, INTERNAL REFERENCE CLOCK INPUT 61 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3.7 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT INTERRUPT SUMMARY All the interrupt can be masked by the GLB_IM bit (b1, GCF) globally or by the corresponding interrupt mask bit individually. For all the interrupt sources, if not masked, the occurrence of the interrupt event will trigger an interrupt indicated by the INT pin. For per-channel interrupt sources, if not masked, the occurrence of the interrupt event will also cause the corresponding INT_CHn bit (INTCH1~3) to be set ‘1’. There are altogether 20 kinds of interrupt sources as listed in Table25. Among them, No.1 to No.19 are per-channel interrupt sources, while No. 20 is a global interrupt source. For interrupt sources from No.1 to No.10, the occurrence of the event will cause the corresponding Status bit to be set to ‘1’. And selected by the Interrupt Trigger Edges Select bit, either a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or any transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’ of the Status bit will cause the Interrupt Status bit to be set to ‘1’, which indicates the occurrence of an interrupt event. An interrupt event is cleared by writing ‘1’ to the corresponding Interrupt Status bit. The INT_CHn bit (INTCH1~3) will not be cleared until all the interrupts in the corresponding channel are acknowledged. The INT pin will be inactive until all the interrupts are acknowledged. Refer to Figure-40 for interrupt service flow. For interrupt sources from No.11 to No.20, the occurrence of the event will cause the corresponding Interrupt Status Bit to be set to ‘1’. Table-25 Interrupt Summary No. Interrupt Source Status Bit Interrupt Trigger Edges Select Bit Interrupt Status Bit Interrupt Mask Bit 1 TCLKn is missing. TCKLOS_S (b3, STAT0,...) TCKLOS_IES (b3, INTES,...) TCKLOS_IS (b3, INTS0,...) TCKLOS_IM (b3, INTM0,...) 2 LLOS is detected. LLOS_S (b0, STAT0,...) LOS_IES (b1, INTES,...) LLOS_IS (b0, INTS0,...) LLOS_IM (b0, INTM0,...) 3 SLOS is detected. SLOS_S (b1, STAT0,...) LOS_IES (b1, INTES,...) SLOS _IS (b1, INTS0,...) SLOS_IM (b1, INTM0,...) 4 TLOS is detected. TLOS_S (b2, STAT0,...) TLOS_IES (b2, INTES,...) TLOS_IS (b2, INTS0,...) TLOS_IM (b2, INTM0,...) 5 LAIS is detected. LAIS_S (b6, STAT1,...) AIS_IES (b6, INTES,...) LAIS_IS (b6, INTS1,...) LAIS_IM (b6, INTM1,...) 6 SAIS is detected. SAIS_S (b7, STAT1,...) AIS_IES (b6, INTES,...) SAIS_IS (b7, INTS1,...) SAIS_IM (b7, INTM1,...) 7 TOC is detected. TOC_S (b4, STAT0,...) TOC_IES (b4, INTES,...) TOC_IS (b4, INTS0,...) TOC_IM (b4, INTM0,...) 8 The PRBS/ARB pattern is detected synchronized. PA_S (b5, STAT1,...) PA_IES (b5, INTES,...) PA_IS (b5, INTS1,...) PA_IM (b5, INTM1,...) 9 Activate IB code is detected. IBA_S (b1, STAT1,...) IB_IES (b0, INTES,...) IBA_IS (b1, INTS1,...) IBA_IM (b1, INTM1,...) 10 Deactivate IB code is detected. IBD_S (b0, STAT1,...) IB_IES (b0, INTES,...) IBD_IS (b0, INTS1,...) IBD_IM (b0, INTM1,...) 11 The FIFO of the RJA is overflow or underflow. - - RJA_IS (b5, INTS0,...) RJA_IM (b5, INTM0,...) 12 The FIFO of the TJA is overflow or underflow. - - TJA_IS (b6, INTS0,...) TJA_IM (b6, INTM0,...) 13 Waveform amplitude is overflow. - - DAC_IS (b7, INTS0,...) DAC_IM (b7, INTM0,...) 14 SBPV is detected. - - SBPV_IS (b5, INTS2,...) SBPV_IM (b5, INTM2,...) 15 LBPV is detected. - - LBPV_IS (b4, INTS2,...) LBPV_IM (b4, INTM2,...) 16 SEXZ is detected. - - SEXZ_IS (b3, INTS2,...) SEXZ_IM (b3, INTM2,...) 17 LEXZ is detected. - - LEXZ_IS (b2, INTS2,...) LEXZ_IM (b2, INTM2,...) 18 PRBS/ARB error is detected. - - ERR_IS (b1, INTS2,...) ERR_IM (b1, INTM2,...) 19 The ERRCH and ERRCL registers are overflowed. - - CNTOV_IS (b0, INTS2,...) CNTOV_IM (b0, INTM2,...) 20 One second time is over. - - TMOV_IS (b0, INTTM) TMOV_IM (b0, GCF) Functional Description 62 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT INT active No Read TMOV_IS Read INT_CHn TMOV_IS = 1 ? INT_CHn = 1 ? Yes No Yes Serve the interrupt. Write '1' to clear TMOV_IS. Read the interrupt status bits in the corresponding channel. Find the interrupt source and serve it. Write '1' to clear the corresponding interrupt status bit. INT_CHn is cleared when all interrupts in the corresponding channel are cleared. Figure-40 Interrupt Service Process Functional Description 63 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 4 MISCELLANEOUS 4.1 RESET Power-on reset Hardware reset Global software reset The reset operation resets all registers, state machines as well as I/O pins to their default value or status. The IDT82P2816 provides 4 kinds of reset: • Power-on reset; • Hardware reset; • Global software reset; • Per-channel software reset. Per-channel software reset The Power-on, Hardware and Global software reset operations reset all the common blocks (including clock generator/synthesizer and microprocessor interface) and channel-related parts. The Per-channel software reset operation resets the channel-related parts. Figure-41 shows a general overview of the reset options. clock generator/ synthesizer microprocessor interface channel During reset, all the line interface pins (i.e., TTIPn/TRINGn and RTIPn/RRINGn) are in High-Z state. Figure-41 Reset After reset, all the items listed in Table-26 are true. Table-26 After Reset Effect Summary Effect On ... Power-On Reset, Hardware Reset and Global Software Reset Per-Channel Software Reset TTIPn/TRINGn & RTIPn/ All TTIPn/TRINGn & RTIPn/RRINGn pins are in High-Z state. RRINGn Only TTIPn/TRINGn & RTIPn/RRINGn in the corresponding channel are in High-Z. Line Interface Mode All channels are reset to T1/J1 mode. Only the corresponding channel is reset to T1/J1 mode. System interface All channels are in Dual Rail NRZ Format. Only the corresponding channel is in Dual Rail NRZ Format. General I/O pins (i.e., As input pins. D[7:0] and GPIO[1:0]) INT (No effect) Open drain output. (No effect) CLKT1, CLKE1, REFA, Output enable. REFB (No effect) LLOS, LLOS0 Output enable. (No effect) TDO, SDO/ACK/RDY High-Z. (No effect) state machines All state machines are reset. The state machines in the corresponding channel are reset. Interrupt sources All interrupt sources are masked. The interrupt sources in the corresponding channel are masked. Registers All registers are reset to their default value. The registers in the corresponding channel are reset to their default value except that there is no effect on the T1E1 bit. Miscellaneous 64 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 4.1.1 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT This reset is different from other resets, for: • It does not reset the T1E1 bit (b0, CHCF,...). That is, the operation mode of each channel is not changed; • It does not reset the global registers, state machines and common pins (including the pins of clock generator, microprocessor interface and JTAG interface); • It does not reset the other channels. POWER-ON RESET Power-on reset is initiated during power-up. When all VDD inputs (1.8V and 3.3V) reach approximately 60% of the standard value of VDD, power-on reset begins. If MCLK is applied, power-on reset will complete within 1 ms maximum; if MCLK is not applied, the device remains in reset state. 4.1.2 HARDWARE RESET 4.2 Pulling the RST pin to low will initiate hardware reset. The reset cycle should be more than 1 µs. If the RST pin is held low continuously, the device remains in reset state. 4.1.3 The microprocessor interface provides access to read and write the registers in the device. The interface consists of: • Serial microprocessor interface; • Parallel Motorola Non-Multiplexed microprocessor interface; • Parallel Motorola Multiplexed microprocessor interface; • Parallel Intel Non-Multiplexed microprocessor interface; • Parallel Intel Multiplexed microprocessor interface. GLOBAL SOFTWARE RESET Writing the RST register will initiate global software reset. Once initiated, global software reset completes in 1 µs maximum. 4.1.4 MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE PER-CHANNEL SOFTWARE RESET The microprocessor interface is selected by the P/S, INT/MOT and IM pins, as shown in Table-27. The interfaced pins in different interfaces are also listed in Table-27. Refer to Section 8.13 Microprocessor Interface Timing for the timing characteristics. Writing a ‘1’ to the CHRST bit (b1, CHCF,...) will initiate per-channel software reset. Once initiated, per-channel software reset completes in 1 µs maximum and the CHRST bit (b1, CHCF,...) is self cleared. Table-27 Microprocessor Interface P/S INT/MOT IM Microprocessor Interface Interfaced Pins GNDD Open GNDD Serial microprocessor interface CS, SCLK, SDI, SDO GNDD Parallel Motorola Non-Multiplexed microprocessor interface CS, DS, R/W, ACK, D[7:0], A[10:0] Open Parallel Motorola Multiplexed microprocessor interface CS, AS, DS, R/W, ACK, D[7:0], A[10:8] GNDD Parallel Intel Non-Multiplexed microprocessor interface CS, RD, WR, RDY, D[7:0], A[10:0] Open Parallel Intel Multiplexed microprocessor interface CS, ALE, RD, WR, RDY, D[7:0], A[10:8] GNDD VDDIO Open Miscellaneous 65 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 4.3 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT POWER UP Figure-42, Figure-43 and Figure-44 for different protection schemes. The IDT82P2816 provides an enhanced architecture to support both protection schemes. No power up sequencing for the VDD inputs (1.8 V and 3.3 V) has to be provided for the IDT82P2816. A Power-on reset will be initiated during power up. Refer to Section 4.1 Reset. IDT82P2816 highlights for HPS support: • Independent programmable receive and transmit high impedance for Tip and Ring inputs and outputs to support 1+1 and 1:1 redundancy • Fully integrated receive termination, required to support 1:1 redundancy • Enhanced internal architecture to guarantee High Impedance for Tip and Ring Inputs and Outputs during Power Off or Power Failure • Asynchronous hardware control (OE, RIM) for fast global high impedance of receiver and transmitter (hot switching between working and backup board) 4.4 HITLESS PROTECTION SWITCHING (HPS) SUMMARY In today’s telecommunication systems, ensuring no traffic loss is becoming increasingly important. To combat these problems, redundancy protection must be built into the systems carrying this traffic. There are many types of redundancy protection schemes, including 1+1 and 1:1 hardware protection without the use of external relays. Refer to VDDTn Tx 1:2 • VDDTn Hot switch control • OE VDDRn Rx 1:1 • VDDRn RIM • 120 Ω LIU on primary line card VDDTn Tx • VDDTn OE • VDDRn RIM Rx • VDDRn • LIU on backup line card backplane interface card Rx: Partially Internal Impedance Matching mode. A fixed external 120 Ω resistor is placed on the backplane and provides a common termination for T1/J1/E1 applications. The R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) setting is as follows: ‘000’ for T1 100 Ω twisted pair cable, ‘001’ for J1 110 Ω twisted pair cable, ‘010’ for E1 120 Ω twisted pair cable and ‘011’ for E1 75 Ω coaxial cable. Tx: Internal Impedance Matching mode. The T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) setting is as follows: ‘000’ for T1 100Ω twisted pair cable, ‘001’ for J1 110 Ω twisted pair cable, ‘010’ for E1 120 Ω twisted pair cable and ‘011’ for E1 75 Ω coaxial cable. Figure-42 1+1 HPS Scheme, Differential Interface (Shared Common Transformer) Miscellaneous 66 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT VDDTn Tx Hot switch control • 1:2 VDDTn • OE VDDRn Rx 1:1 • VDDRn RIM • primary card VDDTn Tx • 1:2 VDDTn OE • VDDRn Rx RIM 1:1 • VDDRn • backup card Rx: Fully Internal Impedance Matching mode. In this mode, there is no external resistor required. The R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) setting is as follows: ‘000’ for T1 100Ω twisted pair cable, ‘001’ for J1 110 Ω twisted pair cable, ‘010’ for E1 120 Ω twisted pair cable and ‘011’ for E1 75 Ω coaxial cable. Tx: Internal Impedance Matching mode. The T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) setting is as follows: ‘000’ for T1 100 Ω twisted pair cable, ‘001’ for J1 110 Ω twisted pair cable, ‘010’ for E1 120 Ω twisted pair cable and ‘011’ for E1 75 Ω coaxial cable. Figure-43 1:1 HPS Scheme, Differential Interface (Individual Transformer) Miscellaneous 67 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT VDDTn Tx Hot switch control 1:2 • 4.7 µF OE VDDRn Rx 0.47 µF • 1:2 19 Ω RIM primary line card Tx OE RIM Rx backup line card Rx: 75 Ω External Impedance Matching mode. In this mode, there is no external resistor required. The RIM pin should be left open and the configuration of the R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) is ignored. Tx: 75 Ω Internal Impedance Matching mode. The T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) should be set to ‘011’. Figure-44 1+1 HPS Scheme, E1 75 ohm Single-Ended Interface (Shared Common Transformer) Miscellaneous 68 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 5 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5.1 REGISTER MAP 5.1.1 GLOBAL REGISTER Address (Hex) Register Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reference Page ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0 P 73 RST7 RST6 RST5 RST4 RST3 RST2 RST1 RST0 P 73 Common Control 000 ID - Device ID Register 040 RST - Global Reset Register 080 GCF - Global Configuration Register - - - COPY INT_PIN1 INT_PIN0 GLB_IM TMOV_IM P 74 0C0 MON - G.772 Monitor Configuration Register - - MON5 MON4 MON3 MON2 MON1 MON0 P 75 100 GPIO - General Purpose I/O Pin Definition Register - - - - LEVEL1 LEVEL0 DIR1 DIR0 P 76 Reference Clock Timing Option 1C0 CLKG - CLKT1 & CLKE1 Generation Control Register - - - - CLKE1_EN CLKE1 CLKT1_EN CLKT1 P 77 200 REFCF - REFA/B Output Configuration Register - JA_BYPAS REFH FS_BYPAS FREE FREQ2 FREQ1 FREQ0 P 77 240 REFA - REFA Clock Sources Configuration Register - REFA_EN CKA_T1E1 REFA4 REFA3 REFA2 REFA1 REFA0 P 79 280 REFB - REFB Clock Sources Configuration Register - REFB_EN CKB_T1E1 REFB4 REFB3 REFB2 REFB1 REFB0 P 79 Interrupt Indication 2C0 INTCH1 - Interrupt Requisition INT_CH8 Source Register 1 INT_CH7 INT_CH6 INT_CH5 INT_CH4 INT_CH3 INT_CH2 INT_CH1 P 80 300 INTCH2 - Interrupt Requisition INT_CH16 Source Register 2 INT_CH15 INT_CH14 INT_CH13 INT_CH12 INT_CH11 INT_CH10 INT_CH9 P 80 380 INTCH3 - Interrupt Requisition INT_CH0 Source Register 3 - - - - - - - P 80 3C0 INTTM - One Second Timer Interrupt Status Register - - - - - - TMOV_IS P 81 Programming Information - 69 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 5.1.2 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT PER-CHANNEL REGISTER Except for registers 7E5~7E9, which are channel 0 related registers, only the address of channel 1 is listed in the ‘Address (Hex)’ column of the following table. For the addresses of the other channels, refer to the description of each register. Address (Hex) Register Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reference Page CHCF - Channel Configuration Register - - - - - - CHRST T1E1 P 81 - - - TJA_LIMT TJA_EN TJA_DP1 TJA_DP0 TJA_BW P 82 RJA_LIMT RJA_EN RJA_DP1 RJA_DP0 RJA_BW P 83 THZ_OC T_SING T_TERM2 T_TERM1 T_TERM0 P 84 TCK_ES TD_INV T_CODE T_MD1 T_MD0 P 85 Channel Control 001 JA Configuration 002 TJA - Transmit Jitter Attenuation Configuration Register 003 RJA - Receive Jitter Attenuation Configuration Register Transmit Path Configuration 004 TCF0 - Transmit Configuration Register 0 - OE T_OFF 005 TCF1 - Transmit Configuration TMF_DEF2 TEM_DEF1 TMF_DEF0 Register 1 006 PULS - Transmit Pulse Configuration Register - - - - PULS3 PULS2 PULS1 PULS0 P 86 007 SCAL - Amplitude Scaling Control Register - - SCAL5 SCAL4 SCAL3 SCAL2 SCAL1 SCAL0 P 87 008 AWG0 - Arbitrary Waveform Generation Control Register 0 - DONE RW SAMP4 SAMP3 SAMP2 SAMP1 SAMP0 P 87 009 AWG1 - Arbitrary Waveform Generation Control Register 1 - WDAT6 WDAT5 WDAT4 WDAT3 WDAT2 WDAT1 WDAT0 P 88 RCKH RHZ R_OFF R120IN R_SING R_TERM2 R_TERM1 R_TERM0 P 89 RCK_ES RD_INV R_CODE R_MD1 R_MD0 P 90 Receive Path Configuration 00A RCF0 - Receive Configuration Register 0 00B RCF1 - Receive Configuration RMF_DEF2 RMF_DEF1 RMF_DEF0 Register 1 00C RCF2 - Receive Configuration Register 2 - - - - - - MG1 MG0 P 91 LAC ALOS2 ALOS1 ALOS0 TALOS1 TALOS0 TDLOS1 TDLOS0 P 92 BPV_INS ERR_INS CNT_MD CNT_STOP P 93 ASAIS_SL ASAIS_LLO ALAIS_SLO ALAIS_LLO OS S S S P 94 PG_POS P 95 Diagnostics 00D LOS - LOS Configuration Register 00E ERR - Error Detection & Inser- EXZ_DEF tion Control Register 00F AISG - AIS Generation Control Register - - - - 010 PG - Pattern Generation Control Register - PG_CK PG_EN1 PG_EN0 Programming Information CNT_SEL2 CNT_SEL1 CNT_SEL0 70 PAG_INV PRBG_SEL PRBG_SEL 1 0 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 Address (Hex) 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Bit 1 Bit 0 Reference Page Register Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 011 PD - Pattern Detection Control Register - - - - PD_POS PAD_INV 012 ARBL - Arbitrary Pattern Generation / Detection Low-Byte Register ARB7 ARB6 ARB5 ARB4 ARB3 ARB2 ARB1 ARB0 P 97 013 ARBM - Arbitrary Pattern Generation / Detection Middle-Byte Register ARB15 ARB14 ARB13 ARB12 ARB11 ARB10 ARB9 ARB8 P 97 014 ARBH - Arbitrary Pattern Generation / Detection High-Byte Register ARB23 ARB22 ARB21 ARB20 ARB19 ARB18 ARB17 ARB16 P 97 015 IBL - Inband Loopback Control Register - - IBGL1 IBGL0 IBAL1 IBAL0 IBDL1 IBDL0 P 98 016 IBG - Inband Loopback Generation Code Definition Register IBG7 IBG6 IBG5 IBG4 IBG3 IBG2 IBG1 IBG0 P 98 017 IBDA - Inband Loopback Detection Target Activate Code Definition Register IBA7 IBA6 IBA5 IBA4 IBA3 IBA2 IBA1 IBA0 P 99 018 IBDD - Inband Loopback Detection Target Deactivate Code Definition Register IBD7 IBD6 IBD5 IBD4 IBD3 IBD2 IBD1 IBD0 P 99 019 LOOP - Loopback Control Register - - - - AUTOLP DLP RLP ALP P 100 - AIS_IES PA_IES TOC_IES TCKLOS_I TLOS_IES ES LOS_IES IB_IES P 101 PAD_SEL1 PAD_SEL0 P 96 Interrupt Edge Selection 01A INTES - Interrupt Trigger Edges Select Register Interrupt Mask 01B INTM0 - Interrupt Mask Register 0 DAC_IM TJA_IM RJA_IM TOC_IM TCKLOS_I M TLOS_IM SLOS_IM LLOS_IM P 102 01C INTM1 - Interrupt Mask Register 1 SAIS_IM LAIS_IM PA_IM - - - IBA_IM IBD_IM P 103 01D INTM2 - Interrupt Mask Register 2 - - SBPV_IM LBPV_IM SEXZ_IM LEXZ_IM ERR_IM CNTOV_IM P 104 Status Indication 01E STAT0 - Status Register 0 AUTOLP_S - - TOC_S TCKLOS_S TLOS_S SLOS_S LLOS_S P 105 01F STAT1 - Status Register 1 SAIS_S LAIS_S PA_S - - - IBA_S IBD_S P 106 Interrupt Status Indication 020 INTS0 - Interrupt Status Register 0 DAC_IS TJA_IS RJA_IS TOC_IS TCKLOS_I S TLOS_IS SLOS_IS LLOS_IS P 107 021 INTS1 - Interrupt Status Register 1 SAIS_IS LAIS_IS PA_IS - - - IBA_IS IBD_IS P 108 022 INTS2 - Interrupt Status Register 2 - - SBPV_IS LBPV_IS SEXZ_IS LEXZ_IS ERR_IS CNTOV_IS P 109 Programming Information 71 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 Address (Hex) 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Register Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reference Page 023 ERRCL - Error Counter LowByte Register ERRC7 ERRC6 ERRC5 ERRC4 ERRC3 ERRC2 ERRC1 ERRC0 P 110 024 ERRCH - Error Counter HighByte Register ERRC15 ERRC14 ERRC13 ERRC12 ERRC11 ERRC10 ERRC9 ERRC8 P 110 Counter Jitter Measurement (channel 0 Only) 7E5 JM - Jitter Measurement Configuration For Channel 0 Register - - - - - JM_STOP JM_MD JM_BW P 111 7E6 JIT_PL - Positive Peak Jitter Measurement Low-Byte Register JIT_P7 JIT_P6 JIT_P5 JIT_P4 JIT_P3 JIT_P2 JIT_P1 JIT_P0 P 111 7E7 JIT_PH - Positive Peak Jitter Measurement High-Byte Register - - - - JIT_P11 JIT_P10 JIT_P9 JIT_P8 P 111 7E8 JIT_NL - Negative Peak Jitter Measurement Low-Byte Register JIT_N7 JIT_N6 JIT_N5 JIT_N4 JIT_N3 JIT_N2 JIT_N1 JIT_N0 P 112 7E9 JIT_NH - Negative Peak Jitter Measurement High-Byte Register - - - - JIT_N11 JIT_N10 JIT_N9 JIT_N8 P 112 Programming Information 72 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 5.2 REGISTER DESCRIPTION 5.2.1 GLOBAL REGISTER ID - Device ID Register Address: 000H Type: Read Default Value: 30H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0 Bit Name Description 7-0 ID[7:0] The ID[7:0] bits are pre-set. The ID[7:4] bits represent the device ID for the IDT82P2816. The ID[3:0] bits represent the current version number (‘0000’ is for the first version). RST - Global Reset Register Address: 040H Type: Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RST7 RST6 RST5 RST4 RST3 RST2 RST1 RST0 Bit Name 7-0 RST[7:0] Programming Information Description Writing this register will initiate global software reset. This reset completes in 1 µs maximum. 73 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT GCF - Global Configuration Register Address: 080H Type: Read / Write Default Value: 03H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - COPY INT_PIN1 INT_PIN0 GLB_IM TMOV_IM Bit Name Description 7-5 4 COPY 3-2 INT_PIN[1:0] 1 GLB_IM 0 TMOV_IM Reserved. When the per-channel register of one channel is written, this bit determines whether the written value is copied to the same register of the other channels simultaneously. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. These two bits control the output on the INT pin. X0: Open drain, active low. (default) 01: Push-pull, active low. 11: Push-pull, active high. This bit is a global configuration interrupt mask bit. 0: The per-channel interrupt will be generated when the per-channel interrupt mask bit is ‘0’ and the corresponding interrupt status bit is ‘1’. 1: Mask all the per-channel interrupts. None per-channel interrupts can be generated. (default) This bit controls whether the interrupt is generated when one second time is over. This one second timer is locked to MCLK. 0: Enable. 1: Mask. (default) Programming Information 74 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT MON - G.772 Monitor Configuration Register Address: 0C0H Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - MON5 MON4 MON3 MON2 MON1 MON0 Bit Name Description 7-6 5-0 MON[5:0] Reserved. These bits determine whether the G.772 Monitor is implemented. When the G.772 Monitor is implemented, these bits select one transmitter or receiver to be monitored by channel 0. 000000: No transmitter or receiver is monitored. (default) 000001: The receiver of channel 1 is monitored. 000010: The receiver of channel 2 is monitored. ...... 001111: The receiver of channel 15 is monitored. 010000: The receiver of channel 16 is monitored. 010001 ~ 011111: Reserved. 100000: No transmitter or receiver is monitored. 100001: The transmitter of channel 1 is monitored. 100010: The transmitter of channel 2 is monitored. ...... 101111: The transmitter of channel 15 is monitored. 110000: The transmitter of channel 16 is monitored. 110001 ~ 111111: Reserved. Programming Information 75 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT GPIO - General Purpose I/O Pin Definition Register Address: 100H Type: Read / Write Default Value: 0FH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - LEVEL1 LEVEL0 DIR1 DIR0 Bit Name 7-4 3 LEVEL1 2 LEVEL0 1 DIR1 0 DIR0 Programming Information Description Reserved. When the GPIO1 pin is defined as output, this bit determines the output level on GPIO1 and can be read and written. 0: Output low level. 1: Output high level. (default) When the GPIO1 pin is defined as input, this bit indicates the input level on GPIO1 and can only be read. 0: Input low level. 1: Input high level. (default) When the GPIO0 pin is defined as output, this bit determines the output level on GPIO0 and can be read and written. 0: Output low level. 1: Output high level. When the GPIO0 pin is defined as input, this bit indicates the input level on GPIO0 and can only be read. 0: Input low level. 1: Input high level. (default) This bit determines whether the GPIO1 pin is used as output or input. 0: Output. 1: Input. (default) This bit determines whether the GPIO0 pin is used as output or input. 0: Output. 1: Input. (default) 76 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT CLKG - CLKT1 & CLKE1 Generation Control Register Address: 1C0H Type: Read / Write Default Value: 0FH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - CLKE1_EN CLKE1 CLKT1_EN CLKT1 Bit Name Description 7-4 3 CLKE1_EN 2 CLKE1 1 CLKT1_EN 0 CLKT1 Reserved. This bit controls whether the output on the CLKE1 pin is enabled. 0: The output is disabled. CLKE1 is in High-Z state. 1: The output is enabled. The frequency of CLKE1 is determined by the CLKE1 bit (b2, CLKG). (default) This bit is valid only when the CLKE1_EN bit (b3, CLKG) is ‘1’. This bit selects the clock frequency output on the CLKE1 pin. 0: 8 KHz. 1: 2.048 MHz. (default) This bit controls whether the output on the CLKT1 pin is enabled. 0: The output is disabled. CLKT1 is in High-Z state. 1: The output is enabled. The frequency of CLKT1 is determined by the CLKT1 bit (b0, CLKG). (default) This bit is valid only when the CLKT1_EN bit (b1, CLKG) is ‘1’. This bit selects the clock frequency output on the CLKT1 pin. 0: 8 KHz. 1: 1.544 MHz. (default) REFCF - REFA/B Output Configuration Register Address: 200H Type: Read / Write Default Value: 30H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - JA_BYPAS REFH FS_BYPAS FREE FREQ2 FREQ1 FREQ0 Bit Name Description 7 6 JA_BYPAS 5 REFH 4 FS_BYPAS Reserved. This bit is valid only when the clock source for REFA or REFB is the recovered clock of one of the 17 channels in the corresponding receiver. This bit determines whether the selected recovered clock passes through the RJA. 0: The selected recovered clock is derived from the output of RJA. (default) 1: The selected recovered clock does not pass through the RJA and is derived from the output of Rx Clock & Data Recovery. This bit is valid only when the selected clock source is lost. This bit controls the output on REFA/REFB. For REFA, this bit, together with the FS_BYPAS bit (b4, REFCF) and the FREE bit (b3, REFCF), controls the output on REFA when the selected clock source is the recovered clock of one of the 17 channels; this bit is ignored when the selected clock source is CLKA. Refer to the related table in the description of the FREE bit (b3, REFCF). For REFB: 0: Output free running clock. The frequency is 1.544 MHz if the selected clock source was T1 clock or 2.048 MHz if the selected clock source was E1 clock. 1: Output high level. (default) This bit determines whether the selected clock source for REFA passes through an internal Frequency Synthesizer. 0: The internal Frequency Synthesizer is enabled. 1: The internal Frequency Synthesizer is bypassed. (default) Programming Information 77 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 3 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT FREE This bit is valid only when the selected clock source for REFA passes the internal Frequency Synthesizer In normal operation: 0: Output the clock which is locked to the selected clock source and the frequency is programmed in the FREQ[2:0] bits (b2~0, REFCF). (default) 1: Output free running clock which is locked to MCLK and the frequency is programmed in the FREQ[2:0] bits (b2~0, REFCF). When the selected clock source is lost, this bit, together with the FS_BYPAS bit (b4, REFCF) and the REFH bit (b5, REFCF), controls the output on REFA: Selected Clock Source FS_BYPA S FREE 0 0 CLKA (don’tcare) 1 1 (don’t-care) 0 0 Recovered clock of one of the 17 channels. 1 1 2-0 FREQ[2:0] Programming Information REFH (don’tcare) Output On REFA High level. Free running clock, whose frequency is programmed in the FREQ[2:0] bits (b2~0, REFCF). High level. 0 Free running clock, whose frequency is programmed in the FREQ[2:0] bits (b2~0, REFCF). 1 High level. (don’tcare) Free running clock, whose frequency is programmed in the FREQ[2:0] bits (b2~0, REFCF). 0 Free running clock, whose frequency is 1.544 MHz in T1 mode or 2.048 MHz in E1 mode. 1 High level. These bits are valid only when the Frequency Synthesizer on REFA is enabled. These bits determine the output clock frequency. FREQ[2:0] Output when FS_BYPAS=0, FREE=0 and the Frequency Synthesizer uses RCLKn or CLKA as reference clock Output when FS_BYPAS=0 and FREE=1 (the Frequency Synthesizer is free running) 000 1.544 MHz if the selected clock source is 1.544 MHz; or 2.048 MHz if the selected clock source is 2.048 MHz - 001 8 kHz 8 kHz 010 64 kHz 64 kHz 011 Reserved - 100 4.096 MHz 4.096 MHz 101 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz 110 19.44 MHz 19.44 MHz 111 32.768 MHz 32.768 MHz 78 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT REFA - REFA Clock Sources Configuration Register Address: 240H Type: Read / Write Default Value: 41H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - REFA_EN CKA_T1E1 REFA4 REFA3 REFA2 REFA1 REFA0 Bit Name Description 7 6 REFA_EN 5 CKA_T1E1 4-0 REFA[4:0] Reserved. This bit controls whether the output on the REFA pin is enabled. 0: The output is disabled. REFA is in High-Z state. 1: The output is enabled. (default) This bit defines the input clock frequency on the CLKA pin. 0: Input T1 clock. (default) 1: Input E1 clock. These bits select the clock source for REFA. 00000: Recovered clock of channel 0. 00001: Recovered clock of channel 1. (default) 00010: Recovered clock of channel 2. ...... 01111: Recovered clock of channel 15. 10000: Recovered clock of channel 16. 10001 ~ 11111: The input on CLKA. REFB - REFB Clock Sources Configuration Register Address: 280H Type: Read / Write Default Value: 41H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - REFB_EN CKB_T1E1 REFB4 REFB3 REFB2 REFB1 REFB0 Bit Name 7 6 REFB_EN 5 CKB_T1E1 4-0 REFB[4:0] Programming Information Description Reserved. This bit controls whether the output on the REFB pin is enabled. 0: The output is disabled. REFB is in High-Z state. 1: The output is enabled. (default) This bit defines the input clock frequency on the CLKB pin. 0: Input T1 clock. (default) 1: Input E1 clock. These bits select the clock source for REFB. 00000: Recovered clock of channel 0. 00001: Recovered clock of channel 1. (default) 00010: Recovered clock of channel 2. ...... 01111: Recovered clock of channel 15. 10000: Recovered clock of channel 16. 10001 ~ 11111: The input on CLKB. 79 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT INTCH1 - Interrupt Requisition Source Register 1 Address: 2C0H Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INT_CH8 INT_CH7 INT_CH6 INT_CH5 INT_CH4 INT_CH3 INT_CH2 INT_CH1 Bit Name Description 7-0 INT_CH[8:1] These bits indicate whether there is an interrupt generated in the corresponding channel. The INT_CH[8:1] bits correspond to channel 8 to 1 respectively. 0: No interrupt is generated or all the interrupts are cleared in the corresponding channel. (default) 1: At least one interrupt is generated in the corresponding channel. INTCH2 - Interrupt Requisition Source Register 2 Address: 300H Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INT_CH16 INT_CH15 INT_CH14 INT_CH13 INT_CH12 INT_CH11 INT_CH10 INT_CH9 Bit Name Description 7-0 INT_CH[16:9] These bits indicate whether there is an interrupt generated in the corresponding channel. The INT_CH[16:9] bits correspond to channel 16 to 9 respectively. 0: No interrupt is generated or all the interrupts are cleared in the corresponding channel. (default) 1: At least one interrupt is generated in the corresponding channel. INTCH3 - Interrupt Requisition Source Register 3 Address: 380H Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INT_CH0 - - - - - - - Bit Name 7 INT_CH0 6-0 - Programming Information Description This bit indicates whether there is an interrupt generated in channel 0. 0: No interrupt is generated or all the interrupts are cleared in channel 0. (default) 1: At least one interrupt is generated in channel 0. Reserved. 80 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT INTTM - One Second Timer Interrupt Status Register Address: 3C0H Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 5.2.2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - - - - TMOV_IS Bit Name Description 7-1 0 TMOV_IS Reserved. This bit is valid only when the TMOV_IM bit (b0, GCF) is ‘0’. This bit indicates the interrupt status of one second time over. 0: No one second time over interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: One second time over interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. PER-CHANNEL REGISTER CHCF - Channel Configuration Register Address: 001H, 041H, 081H, 0C1H, 101H, 141H, 181H, 1C1H, (CH1~CH8) 201H, 241H, 281H, 2C1H, 301H, 341H, 381H, 3C1H, (CH9~CH16) 7C1H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - - - CHRST T1E1 Bit Name Description 7-2 1 CHRST 0 T1E1 Reserved. Writing a ‘1’ to this bit will initiate per-channel software reset. Once initiated, per-channel software reset completes in 1 µs maximum. This bit is self cleared. This bit is valid only when the TEHWE pin is low. This bit selects T1/J1 or E1 operation mode. 0: T1/J1. (default) 1: E1. This bit can not be reset by per-channel software reset. Programming Information 81 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT TJA - Transmit Jitter Attenuation Configuration Register Address: 002H, 042H, 082H, 0C2H, 102H, 142H, 182H, 1C2H, (CH1~CH8) 202H, 242H, 282H, 2C2H, 302H, 342H, 382H, 3C2H, (CH9~CH16) 7C2H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - TJA_LIMT TJA_EN TJA_DP1 TJA_DP0 TJA_BW Bit Name Description 7-5 4 TJA_LIMT 3 TJA_EN 2-1 TJA_DP[1:0] 0 TJA_BW Reserved. This bit determines whether the JA-Limit function is enabled in the TJA. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. The speed of the TJA outgoing data will be adjusted automatically if the FIFO in the TJA is 2-bit close to its full or emptiness. This bit controls whether the TJA is enabled to use. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. These bits select the depth of the TJA FIFO. 00: 128-bit. (default) 01: 64-bit. 1X: 32-bit. This bit selects the Corner Frequency for the TJA. 0: 5 Hz (in T1/J1 mode) / 6.77 Hz (in E1 mode). (default) 1: 1.26 Hz (in T1/J1 mode) / 0.87 Hz (in E1 mode). Programming Information 82 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT RJA - Receive Jitter Attenuation Configuration Register Address: 003H, 043H, 083H, 0C3H, 103H, 143H, 183H, 1C3H, (CH1~CH8) 203H, 243H, 283H, 2C3H, 303H, 343H, 383H, 3C3H, (CH9~CH16) 7C3H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - RJA_LIMT RJA_EN RJA_DP1 RJA_DP0 RJA_BW Bit Name Description 7-5 4 RJA_LIMT 3 RJA_EN 2-1 RJA_DP[1:0] 0 RJA_BW Reserved. This bit determines whether the JA-Limit function is enabled in the RJA. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. The speed of the RJA outgoing data will be adjusted automatically if the FIFO in the RJA is 2-bit close to its full or emptiness. This bit controls whether the RJA is enabled to use. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. These bits select the depth of the RJA FIFO. 00: 128-bit. (default) 01: 64-bit. 1X: 32-bit. This bit selects the Corner Frequency for the RJA. 0: 5 Hz (in T1/J1 mode) / 6.77 Hz (in E1 mode). (default) 1: 1.26 Hz (in T1/J1 mode) / 0.87 Hz (in E1 mode). Programming Information 83 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT TCF0 - Transmit Configuration Register 0 Address: 004H, 044H, 084H, 0C4H, 104H, 144H, 184H, 1C4H, (CH1~CH8) 204H, 244H, 284H, 2C4H, 304H, 344H, 384H, 3C4H, (CH9~CH16) 7C4H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - OE T_OFF THZ_OC T_SING T_TERM2 T_TERM1 T_TERM0 Bit Name Description 7 6 OE 5 T_OFF 4 THZ_OC 3 T_SING 2-0 T_TERM[2:0] Reserved. This bit determines the output of the Line Driver, i.e., the output on the TTIPn and TRINGn pins. 0: High-Z. (default) 1: Normal operation. This bit determines whether the transmitter is powered down. 0: Normal operation. (default) 1: Power down. This bit determines the output of the Line Driver, i.e., the output on the TTIPn and TRINGn pins when TOC is detected. 0: The output current is limited to 100 mAp-p. (default) 1: The output current is limited to 100 mAp-p within the first 1 ms after the TOC is detected and then the output is in High-Z state when the TOC is detected for more than 1 ms. This bit determines the transmit line interface. 0: Transmit Differential line interface. Both TTIPn and TRINGn are used to transmit signal to the line side. (default) 1: Transmit Single Ended line interface. Only TTIPn is used to transmit signal. TRINGn should be left open. These bits select the impedance matching mode of the transmit path to match the cable impedance. 000: The 100 Ω internal impedance matching is selected for T1 100 Ω twisted pair cable (with transformer). (default) 001: The 110 Ω internal impedance matching is selected for J1 110 Ω twisted pair cable (with transformer). 010: The 120 Ω internal impedance matching is selected for E1 120 Ω twisted pair cable (with transformer). 011: The 75 Ω internal impedance matching is selected for E1 75 Ω coaxial cable (with transformer). 100: The 100 Ω internal impedance matching is selected for T1 100 Ω twisted pair cable (transformer-less). 101: The 110 Ω internal impedance matching is selected for J1 110 Ω twisted pair cable (transformer-less). 110: The 120 Ω internal impedance matching is selected for E1 120 Ω twisted pair cable (transformer-less). 111: The external impedance matching is selected for E1 120 Ω twisted pair cable or E1 75 Ω coaxial cable (with transformer). Programming Information 84 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT TCF1 - Transmit Configuration Register 1 Address: 005H, 045H, 085H, 0C5H, 105H, 145H, 185H, 1C5H, (CH1~CH8) 205H, 245H, 285H, 2C5H, 305H, 345H, 385H, 3C5H, (CH9~CH16) 7C5H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 01H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TMF_DEF2 TMF_DEF1 TMF_DEF0 TCK_ES TD_INV T_CODE T_MD1 T_MD0 Bit 7-5 4 3 2 1-0 Name Description TMF_DEF[2:0] These bits are valid only in Transmit Dual Rail RZ Format mode and Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode. They determine the indication on the TMFn pin. 000: PRBS/ARB indication when the PRBS/ARB detection is switched to the transmit path. Or reserved when the PRBS/ARB detection is switched to the receive path. (default) 001: SAIS indication. 010: TOC indication. 011: TLOS indication. 100: SEXZ indication. 101: SBPV indication in Transmit Dual Rail RZ Format mode. Reserved in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode. 110: SEXZ + SBPV indication in Transmit Dual Rail RZ Format mode. Reserved in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode. 111: SLOS indication in Transmit Dual Rail RZ Format mode. Reserved in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode. TCK_ES This bit selects the active edge of the TCLKn pin. 0: Falling edge. (default) 1: Rising edge. TD_INV This bit determines the active level on the TDn, TDPn and TDNn pins. 0: Active high. (default) 1: Active low. T_CODE This bit selects the line code rule for the transmit path. 0: B8ZS (in T1/J1 mode) / HDB3 (in E1 mode). (default) 1: AMI. T_MD[1:0] These bits determines the transmit system interface. 00: Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format system interface. The data is input on TDn in NRZ format and a 1.544 MHz (in T1/J1 mode) or 2.048 MHz (in E1 mode) clock is input on TCLKn. 01: Transmit Dual Rail NRZ Format system interface. The data is input on TDPn and TDNn in NRZ format and a 1.544 MHz (in T1/J1 mode) or 2.048 MHz (in E1 mode) clock is input on TCLKn. (default) 10: Transmit Dual Rail RZ Format system interface. The data is input on TDPn and TDNn in RZ format. 11: Reserved. Programming Information 85 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT PULS - Transmit Pulse Configuration Register Address: 006H, 046H, 086H, 0C6H, 106H, 146H, 186H, 1C6H, (CH1~CH8) 206H, 246H, 286H, 2C6H, 306H, 346H, 386H, 3C6H, (CH9~CH16) 7C6H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 02H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - PULS3 PULS2 PULS1 PULS0 Bit Name Description 7-4 3-0 PULS[3:0] Reserved. These bits select one of the eight preset waveform templates for short haul application or enable user-programmable arbitrary waveform. PULS[3:0] Operation Mode Transmit Clock 0000 E1 0001 Cable Impedance Cable Range Cable Loss 2.048 MHz E1 75 Ω differential interface, Internal Impedance matching mode - 0 ~ 12 dB E1 2.048 MHz Other E1 interfaces - 0 ~ 12 dB 0010 (default) DSX1 1.544 MHz 100 Ω 0 ~ 133 ft 0 ~ 0.6 dB 0011 DSX1 1.544 MHz 100 Ω 133 ~ 266 ft 0.6 ~ 1.2 dB 0100 DSX1 1.544 MHz 100 Ω 266 ~ 399 ft 1.2 ~ 1.8 dB 0101 DSX1 1.544 MHz 100 Ω 399 ~ 533 ft 1.8 ~ 2.4 dB 0110 DSX1 1.544 MHz 100 Ω 533 ~ 655 ft 2.4 ~ 3.0 dB 0111 J1 1.544 MHz 110 Ω - 0 ~ 12 dB 1XXX Programming Information User-programmable arbitrary waveform 86 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT SCAL - Amplitude Scaling Control Register Address: 007H, 047H, 087H, 0C7H, 107H, 147H, 187H, 1C7H, (CH1~CH8) 207H, 247H, 287H, 2C7H, 307H, 347H, 387H, 3C7H, (CH9~CH16) 7C7H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 36H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - SCAL5 SCAL4 SCAL3 SCAL2 SCAL1 SCAL0 Bit Name Description 7-6 5-0 SCAL[5:0] Reserved. These bits specify a scaling factor to be applied to the amplitude of the waveform to be transmitted. In T1/J1 mode, the standard value is ‘110110’ for the waveform amplitude. If necessary, increasing or decreasing by ‘1’ from the standard value will result in 2% scaling up or down against the waveform amplitude. The scale range is from +20% to -100%. In E1 mode, the standard value is ‘100001’ for the waveform amplitude. If necessary, increasing or decreasing by ‘1’ from the standard value will result in 3% scaling up or down against the waveform amplitude. The scale range is from +100% to -100%. Note: The default value for SCAL[5:0] is ‘110110’ which is the T1/J1 standard value. Therefore, if E1 mode is used, ‘100001’ should be written to these bits to indicate the E1 standard value. AWG0 - Arbitrary Waveform Generation Control Register 0 Address: 008H, 048H, 088H, 0C8H, 108H, 148H, 188H, 1C8H, (CH1~CH8) 208H, 248H, 288H, 2C8H, 308H, 348H, 388H, 3C8H, (CH9~CH16) 7C8H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - DONE RW SAMP4 SAMP3 SAMP2 SAMP1 SAMP0 Bit Name Description 7 6 DONE 5 RW 4-0 SAMP[4:0] Reserved. This bit is valid only when the user-programmable arbitrary waveform is enabled (i.e., the PULS[3:0] bits (b3~0, PULS,...) are set to ‘1XXX’). This bit determines whether to enable the data writing/reading from RAM. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. This bit is valid only when the user-programmable arbitrary waveform is enabled (i.e., the PULS[3:0] bits (b3~0, PULS,...) are set to ‘1XXX’). This bit determines read/write direction. 0: Write data to RAM. (default) 1: Read data from RAM. These bits are valid only when the user-programmable arbitrary waveform is enabled (i.e., the PULS[3:0] bits (b3~0, PULS,...) are set to ‘1XXX’). These bits specify the RAM sample address. 00000: The RAM sample address is 0. (default) 00001: The RAM sample address is 1. 00010: The RAM sample address is 2. ...... 10001: The RAM sample address is 17. 10010: The RAM sample address is 18. 10011 ~ 11111: The RAM sample address is 19. Programming Information 87 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT AWG1 - Arbitrary Waveform Generation Control Register 1 Address: 009H, 049H, 089H, 0C9H, 109H, 149H, 189H, 1C9H, (CH1~CH8) 209H, 249H, 289H, 2C9H, 309H, 349H, 389H, 3C9H, (CH9~CH16) 7C9H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - WDAT6 WDAT5 WDAT4 WDAT3 WDAT2 WDAT1 WDAT0 Bit Name Description 7 6-0 WDAT[6:0] Reserved. These bits are valid only when the user-programmable arbitrary waveform is enabled (i.e., the PULS[3:0] bits (b3~0, PULS,...) are set to ‘1XXX’). These bits contain the template sample data to be stored in RAM which address is specified by the SAMP[4:0] bits (b4~0, AWG0,...). They are not updated until new template sample data is written. Programming Information 88 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT RCF0 - Receive Configuration Register 0 Address: 00AH, 04AH, 08AH, 0CAH, 10AH, 14AH, 18AH, 1CAH, (CH1~CH8) 20AH, 24AH, 28AH, 2CAH, 30AH, 34AH, 38AH, 3CAH, (CH9~CH16) 7CAH (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 47H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RCKH RHZ R_OFF R120IN R_SING R_TERM2 R_TERM1 R_TERM0 Bit Name Description 7 RCKH 6 RHZ 5 R_OFF 4 R120IN 3 R_SING 2-0 R_TERM[2:0] This bit determines the output on RCLKn when LLOS is detected. This bit is valid only when LLOS is detected and the AIS and pattern generation is disabled in the receive path. 0: XCLK. (default) 1: High level. This bit determines the output of all receive system interfaced pins (including RDn, RDPn, RDNn, RMFn and RCLKn) when the corresponding receiver is powered down. 0: Low level. 1: High-Z. (default) This bit determines whether the receiver is powered down. 0: Normal operation. (default) 1: Power down. This bit is valid only when the receive line interface is in Receive Differential mode and per-channel internal impedance matching configuration is enabled. This bit selects the internal impedance matching mode. 0: Partially Internal Impedance Matching mode. An internal programmable resistor (IM) and a value-fixed external resistor (Rr) are used. (default) 1: Fully Internal Impedance Matching mode. Only an internal programmable resistor (IM) is used. This bit determines the receive line interface. 0: Receive Differential line interface. Both RTIPn and RRINGn are used to receive signal from the line side. (default) 1: Receive Single Ended line interface. Only RTIPn is used to receive signal. RRINGn should be left open. These bits are valid only when impedance matching is configured on a per-channel basis. These bits select the impedance matching mode of the receive path to match the cable impedance. In Receive Differential mode: 000: The 100 Ω internal impedance matching is selected for T1 100 Ω twisted pair cable. 001: The 110 Ω internal impedance matching is selected for J1 110 Ω twisted pair cable. 010: The 120 Ω internal impedance matching is selected for E1 120 Ω twisted pair cable. 011: The 75 Ω internal impedance matching is selected for E1 75 Ω coaxial cable. 1XX: External impedance matching is selected for T1 100 Ω, J1 110 Ω, E1 120 Ω twisted pair cable and E1 75 Ω coaxial cable. In Receive Single Ended mode, only External Impedance Matching is supported and the setting of these bits is a don’t-care. (default) Programming Information 89 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT RCF1 - Receive Configuration Register 1 Address: 00BH, 04BH, 08BH, 0CBH, 10BH, 14BH, 18BH, 1CBH, (CH1~CH8) 20BH, 24BH, 28BH, 2CBH, 30BH, 34BH, 38BH, 3CBH, (CH9~CH16) 7CBH (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 01H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RMF_DEF2 RMF_DEF1 RMF_DEF0 RCK_ES RD_INV R_CODE R_MD1 R_MD0 Bit 7-5 4 3 2 1-0 Name Description RMF_DEF[2:0] These bits are valid only in Receive Single Rail NRZ Format mode and Receive Dual Rail Sliced mode. They determine the output on the RMFn pin. 000: PRBS/ARB indication when the PRBS/ARB detection is switched to the receive path. Or reserved when the PRBS/ARB detection is switched to the transmit path. (default) 001: LAIS indication. 010: XOR data of positive and negative sliced data. 011: Recovered clock (RCLK). 100: LEXZ indication. 101: LBPV indication. 110: LEXZ + LBPV indication. 111: LLOS indication. RCK_ES This bit selects the active edge of the RCLKn pin. 0: Rising edge. (default) 1: Falling edge. RD_INV This bit determines the active level on the RDn, RDPn and RDNn pins. 0: Active high. (default) 1: Active low. R_CODE This bit selects the line code rule for the receive path. 0: B8ZS (in T1/J1 mode) / HDB3 (in E1 mode). (default) 1: AMI. R_MD[1:0] These bits determines the receive system interface. 00: Receive Single Rail NRZ Format system interface. The data is output on RDn in NRZ format and a 1.544 MHz (in T1/J1 mode) or 2.048 MHz (in E1 mode) recovered clock is output on RCLKn. 01: Receive Dual Rail NRZ Format system interface. The data is output on RDPn and RDNn in NRZ format and a 1.544 MHz (in T1/J1 mode) or 2.048 MHz (in E1 mode) recovered clock is output on RCLKn. (default) 10: Receive Dual Rail RZ Format system interface. The data is output on RDPn and RDNn in RZ format and a 1.544 MHz (in T1/ J1 mode) or 2.048 MHz (in E1 mode) recovered clock is output on RCLKn. 11: Receive Dual Rail Sliced system interface. The data is output on RDPn and RDNn in RZ format directly after passing through the Slicer. Programming Information 90 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT RCF2 - Receive Configuration Register 2 Address: 00CH, 04CH, 08CH, 0CCH, 10CH, 14CH, 18CH, 1CCH, (CH1~CH8) 20CH, 24CH, 28CH, 2CCH, 30CH, 34CH, 38CH, 3CCH, (CH9~CH16) 7CCH (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - - - MG1 MG0 Bit Name 7-2 1-0 MG[1:0] Programming Information Description Reserved. These bits select the Monitor Gain. 00: 0 dB. (default) 01: 20 dB. 10: 26 dB. 11: 32 dB. 91 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT LOS - LOS Configuration Register Address: 00DH, 04DH, 08DH, 0CDH, 10DH, 14DH, 18DH, 1CDH, (CH1~CH8) 20DH, 24DH, 28DH, 2CDH, 30DH, 34DH, 38DH, 3CDH, (CH9~CH16) 7CDH (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 15H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LAC ALOS2 ALOS1 ALOS0 TALOS1 TALOS0 TDLOS1 TDLOS0 Bit Name Description 7 LAC 6-4 ALOS[2:0] This bit selects the LLOS, SLOS and AIS criteria. 0: T1.231 (in T1/J1 mode) / G.775 (in E1 mode). (default) 1: I.431 (in T1/J1 mode) / ETSI 300233 & I.431 (in E1 mode). These bits select the amplitude threshold (Q). When the amplitude of the data is less than Q Vpp for N consecutive pulse intervals, LLOS is declared. The consecutive pulse intervals (N) are determined by the LAC bit (b7, LOS,...). The ALOS[2:0] settings for Normal Receive mode and Line Monitor mode are different. Refer to below tables. ALOS[2:0] Setting in Normal Receive Mode ALOS[2:0] Q (Vpp) vs. 6.0 Vpp (dB) vs. 4.74 Vpp (dB) 000 0.5 21.58 19.54 001 (default) 0.7 18.66 16.61 010 0.9 16.48 14.43 011 1.2 13.98 11.93 100 1.4 12.64 10.59 101 1.6 11.48 9.43 110 1.8 10.46 8.41 111 2.0 9.54 7.49 vs. 6.0 Vpp (dB) vs. 4.74 Vpp (dB) ALOS[2:0] Setting in Line Monitor Mode ALOS[2:0] Q (Vpp) 000 1.0 15.56 13.52 001 (default) 1.4 12.64 10.59 010 1.8 10.46 8.41 011 2.2 8.71 6.67 1xx 3-2 TALOS[1:0] Programming Information reserved. These bits select the amplitude threshold. When the amplitude of the data is less than the threshold for a certain period, TLOS is declared. The period is determined by the TDLOS bits (b1~0, LOS,...). When the amplitude of a pulse is above the threshold, TLOS is cleared. For Differential line interface: 00: 1.2 Vp. 01: 0.9 Vp. (default) 10: 0.6 Vp. 11: 0.4 Vp. For Single Ended line interface: 00: 0.61 Vp. 01: 0.48 Vp. (default) 10: 0.32 Vp. 11: 0.24 Vp. 92 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 1-0 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT TDLOS[1:0] These bits select the period. When the amplitude of the data is less than a certain voltage for the period, TLOS is declared. The voltage is determined by the TALOS bits (b3~2, LOS,...). 00: 16-pulse. 01: 32-pulse. (default) 1X: 64-pulse. ERR - Error Detection & Insertion Control Register Address: 00EH, 04EH, 08EH, 0CEH, 10EH, 14EH, 18EH, 1CEH, (CH1~CH8) 20EH, 24EH, 28EH, 2CEH, 30EH, 34EH, 38EH, 3CEH, (CH9~CH16) 7CEH (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EXZ_DEF BPV_INS ERR_INS CNT_SEL2 CNT_SEL1 CNT_SEL0 CNT_MD CNT_STOP Bit Name 7 EXZ_DEF 6 5 4-2 1 0 Description This bit selects the EXZ definition standard. 0: ANSI. (default) 1: FCC. BPV_INS This bit controls whether to insert a bipolar violation (BPV) to the transmit path. Writing ‘1’ to this bit will insert a BPV on the next available mark in the data stream to be transmitted. This bit is cleared once the BPV insertion is completed. ERR_INS This bit controls whether to insert a single bit error to the generated PRBS/ARB pattern. A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on this bit will insert a single bit error to the generated PRBS/ARB pattern. This bit is cleared once the single bit error insertion is completed. CNT_SEL[2:0] These bits select what kind of error to be counted by the internal Error Counter. 000: Disable. (default) 001: LBPV. 010: LEXZ. 011: LBPV + LEXZ. 100: SBPV. 101: SEXZ. 110: SBPV + SEXZ. 111: PRBS/ARB error. CNT_MD This bit determines whether the ERRCH & ERRCL registers are updated automatically or manually. 0: Manually by setting the CNT_STOP bit (b0, ERR,...). (default) 1: Every-one second automatically. CNT_STOP This bit is valid only when the CNT_MD bit (b1, ERR,...) is ‘0’. A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on this bit updates the ERRCH & ERRCL registers. This bit must be cleared before the next round. Programming Information 93 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT AISG - AIS Generation Control Register Address: 00FH, 04FH, 08FH, 0CFH, 10FH, 14FH, 18FH, 1CFH, (CH1~CH8) 20FH, 24FH, 28FH, 2CFH, 30FH, 34FH, 38FH, 3CFH, (CH9~CH16) 7CFH (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - ASAIS_SLOS ASAIS_LLOS ALAIS_SLOS ALAIS_LLOS Bit Name 7-4 3 ASAIS_SLOS 2 ASAIS_LLOS 1 ALAIS_SLOS 0 ALAIS_LLOS Programming Information Description Reserved. This bit controls the AIS generation in the receive path once SLOS is detected. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. This bit controls the AIS generation in the receive path once LLOS is detected. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. This bit controls the AIS generation in the transmit path once SLOS is detected. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. This bit controls the AIS generation in the transmit path once LLOS is detected. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. 94 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT PG - Pattern Generation Control Register Address: 010H, 050H, 090H, 0D0H, 110H, 150H, 190H, 1D0H, (CH1~CH8) 210H, 250H, 290H, 2D0H, 310H, 350H, 390H, 3D0H, (CH9~CH16) 7D0H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - PG_CK PG_EN1 PG_EN0 PG_POS PAG_INV PRBG_SEL1 PRBG_SEL0 Bit Name 7 6 PG_CK 5-4 3 2 1-0 Description Reserved. This bit selects the reference clock when the pattern (including PRBS, ARB & IB) is generated. When the pattern is generated in the receive path: 0: XCLK. (default) 1: Recovered clock from the received signal. When the pattern is generated in the transmit path: 0: XCLK. (default) 1: Transmit clock, i.e., the clock input on TCLKn (in Transmit Single Rail NRZ Format mode and in Transmit Dual Rail NRZ Format mode) or the clock recovered from the data input on TDPn and TDNn (in Transmit Dual Rail RZ Format mode) PG_EN[1:0] These bits select the pattern to be generated. 00: Disable. (default) 01: PRBS. 10: ARB. 11: IB. PG_POS This bit selects the pattern (including PRBS, ARB & IB) generation direction. 0: Transmit path. (default) 1: Receive path. PAG_INV This bit controls whether to invert the generated PRBS/ARB pattern. 0: Normal. (default) 1: Invert. PRBG_SEL[1:0] These bits are valid only when the PRBS pattern is generated. They select the PRBS pattern. 00: 220 - 1 QRSS. (default) 01: 215 - 1 PRBS. 1X: 211 - 1 PRBS. Programming Information 95 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT PD - Pattern Detection Control Register Address: 011H, 051H, 091H, 0D1H, 111H, 151H, 191H, 1D1H, (CH1~CH8) 211H, 251H, 291H, 2D1H, 311H, 351H, 391H, 3D1H, (CH9~CH16) 7D1H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 03H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - PD_POS PAD_INV PAD_SEL1 PAD_SEL0 Bit Name 7-4 3 PD_POS 2 1-0 Description Reserved. This bit selects the pattern (including PRBS, ARB & IB) detection direction. 0: Receive path. (default) 1: Transmit path. PAD_INV This bit controls whether to invert the data before PRBS/ARB detection. 0: Normal. (default) 1: Invert. PAD_SEL[1:0] These bits select the desired PRBS/ARB pattern to be detected. 00: 220 - 1 QRSS. 01: 215 - 1 PRBS. 10: 211 - 1 PRBS. 11: ARB. (default) Programming Information 96 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT ARBL - Arbitrary Pattern Generation / Detection Low-Byte Register Address: 012H, 052H, 092H, 0D2H, 112H, 152H, 192H, 1D2H, (CH1~CH8) 212H, 252H, 292H, 2D2H, 312H, 352H, 392H, 3D2H, (CH9~CH16) 7D2H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 55H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ARB7 ARB6 ARB5 ARB4 ARB3 ARB2 ARB1 ARB0 Bit Name Description 7-0 ARB[7:0] These bits, together with the ARB[23:8] bits, define the ARB pattern to be generated or detected. The ARB23 bit is the first bit to be generated or detected and the ARB0 bit is the last bit to be generated or detected. ARBM - Arbitrary Pattern Generation / Detection Middle-Byte Register Address: 013H, 053H, 093H, 0D3H, 113H, 153H, 193H, 1D3H, (CH1~CH8) 213H, 253H, 293H, 2D3H, 313H, 353H, 393H, 3D3H, (CH9~CH16) 7D3H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 55H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ARB15 ARB14 ARB13 ARB12 ARB11 ARB10 ARB9 ARB8 Bit Name 7-0 ARB[15:8] Description (Refer to the description of the ARBL register.) ARBH - Arbitrary Pattern Generation / Detection High-Byte Register Address: 014H, 054H, 094H, 0D4H, 114H, 154H, 194H, 1D4H, (CH1~CH8) 214H, 254H, 294H, 2D4H, 314H, 354H, 394H, 3D4H, (CH9~CH16) 7D4H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 55H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ARB23 ARB22 ARB21 ARB20 ARB19 ARB18 ARB17 ARB16 Bit Name 7-0 ARB[23:16] Programming Information Description (Refer to the description of the ARBL register.) 97 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT IBL - Inband Loopback Control Register Address: 015H, 055H, 095H, 0D5H, 115H, 155H, 195H, 1D5H, (CH1~CH8) 215H, 255H, 295H, 2D5H, 315H, 355H, 395H, 3D5H, (CH9~CH16) 7D5H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 01H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - IBGL1 IBGL0 IBAL1 IBAL0 IBDL1 IBDL0 Bit Name 7-6 5-4 IBGL[1:0] 3-2 IBAL[1:0] 1-0 IBDL[1:0] Description Reserved. These bits define the length of the valid IB generation code programmed in the IBG[7:0] bits (b7~0, IBG,...). 00: 5-bit long in the IBG[4:0] bits (b4~0, IBG,...). (default) 01: 6-bit long in the IBG[5:0] bits (b5~0, IBG,...). 10: 7-bit long in the IBG[6:0] bits (b6~0, IBG,...). 11: 8-bit long in the IBG[7:0] bits (b7~0, IBG,...). These bits define the length of the valid target activate IB detection code programmed in the IBA[7:0] bits (b7~0, IBDA,...). 00: 5-bit long in the IBA[4:0] bits (b4~0, IBDA,...). (default) 01: 6-bit long in the IBA[5:0] bits (b5~0, IBDA,...). 10: 7-bit long in the IBA[6:0] bits (b6~0, IBDA,...). 11: 8-bit long in the IBA[7:0] bits (b7~0, IBDA,...). These bits define the length of the valid target deactivate IB detection code programmed in the IBD[7:0] bits (b7~0, IBDD,...). 00: 5-bit long in the IBD[4:0] bits (b4~0, IBDD,...). 01: 6-bit long in the IBD[5:0] bits (b5~0, IBDD,...). (default) 10: 7-bit long in the IBD[6:0] bits (b6~0, IBDD,...). 11: 8-bit long in the IBD[7:0] bits (b7~0, IBDD,...). IBG - Inband Loopback Generation Code Definition Register Address: 016H, 056H, 096H, 0D6H, 116H, 156H, 196H, 1D6H, (CH1~CH8) 216H, 256H, 296H, 2D6H, 316H, 356H, 396H, 3D6H, (CH9~CH16) 7D6H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 01H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IBG7 IBG6 IBG5 IBG4 IBG3 IBG2 IBG1 IBG0 Bit Name Description 7-0 IBG[7:0] The IBG[X:0] bits define the content of the IB generation code. The ‘X’ is determined by the IBGL[1:0] bits (b5~4, IBL,...). The IBG0 bit is the last bit to be generated. The code is generated repeatedly until the IB generation is stopped. Programming Information 98 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT IBDA - Inband Loopback Detection Target Activate Code Definition Register Address: 017H, 057H, 097H, 0D7H, 117H, 157H, 197H, 1D7H, (CH1~CH8) 217H, 257H, 297H, 2D7H, 317H, 357H, 397H, 3D7H, (CH9~CH16) 7D7H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 01H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IBA7 IBA6 IBA5 IBA4 IBA3 IBA2 IBA1 IBA0 Bit Name Description 7-0 IBA[7:0] The IBA[X:0] bits define the content of the target activate IB detection code. The ‘X’ is determined by the IBAL[1:0] bits (b3~2, IBL,...). The IBA0 bit is the last bit to be detected. IBDD - Inband Loopback Detection Target Deactivate Code Definition Register Address: 018H, 058H, 098H, 0D8H, 118H, 158H, 198H, 1D8H, (CH1~CH8) 218H, 258H, 298H, 2D8H, 318H, 358H, 398H, 3D8H, (CH9~CH16) 7D8H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 09H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IBD7 IBD6 IBD5 IBD4 IBD3 IBD2 IBD1 IBD0 Bit Name Description 7-0 IBD[7:0] The IBD[X:0] bits define the content of the target deactivate IB detection code. The ‘X’ is determined by the IBDL[1:0] bits (b1~0, IBL,...). The IBD0 bit is the last bit to be detected. Programming Information 99 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT LOOP - Loopback Control Register Address: 019H, 059H, 099H, 0D9H, 119H, 159H, 199H, 1D9H, (CH1~CH8) 219H, 259H, 299H, 2D9H, 319H, 359H, 399H, 3D9H, (CH9~CH16) 7D9H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - AUTOLP DLP RLP ALP Bit Name Description 7-4 3 AUTOLP 2 DLP 1 RLP 0 ALP Reserved. This bit determines whether automatic Digital/Remote Loopback is enabled. 0: Automatic Digital/Remote Loopback is disabled. (default) 1: Automatic Digital/Remote Loopback is enabled. The corresponding channel will enter Digital/Remote Loopback when the activate IB code is detected in the transmit/receive path for more than 5.1 sec.; and will return from Digital/Remote Loopback when the deactivate IB code is detected in the transmit/receive path for more than 5.1 sec. This bit controls whether Digital Loopback is enabled. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. This bit controls whether Remote Loopback is enabled. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. This bit controls whether Analog Loopback is enabled. 0: Disable. (default) 1: Enable. Programming Information 100 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT INTES - Interrupt Trigger Edges Select Register Address: 01AH, 05AH, 09AH, 0DAH, 11AH, 15AH, 19AH, 1DAH, (CH1~CH8) 21AH, 25AH, 29AH, 2DAH, 31AH, 35AH, 39AH, 3DAH, (CH9~CH16) 7DAH (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - AIS_IES PA_IES TOC_IES TCKLOS_IES TLOS_IES LOS_IES IB_IES Bit Name Description 7 6 AIS_IES 5 PA_IES 4 TOC_IES 3 TCKLOS_IES 2 TLOS_IES 1 LOS_IES 0 IB_IES Reserved. This bit selects the transition edge of the LAIS_S bit (b6, STAT1,...) and the SAIS_S bit (b7, STAT1,...). 0: A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the LAIS_S bit (b6, STAT1,...) / the SAIS_S bit (b7, STAT1,...) will set the LAIS_IS bit (b6, INTS1,...) / the SAIS_IS bit (b7, INTS1,...) to ‘1’ respectively. (default) 1: Any transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’ on the LAIS_S bit (b6, STAT1,...) / the SAIS_S bit (b7, STAT1,...) will set the LAIS_IS bit (b6, INTS1,...) / the SAIS_IS bit (b7, INTS1,...) to ‘1’ respectively. This bit selects the transition edge of the PA_S bit (b5, STAT1,...). 0: A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the PA_S bit (b5, STAT1,...) will set the PA_IS bit (b5, INTS1,...) to ‘1’. (default) 1: Any transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’ on the PA_S bit (b5, STAT1,...) will set the PA_IS bit (b5, INTS1,...) to ‘1’. This bit selects the transition edge of the TOC_S bit (b4, STAT0,...). 0: A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the TOC_S bit (b4, STAT0,...) will set the TOC_IS bit (b4, INTS0,...) to ‘1’. (default) 1: Any transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’ on the TOC_S bit (b4, STAT0,...) will set the TOC_IS bit (b4, INTS0,...) to ‘1’. This bit selects the transition edge of the TCKLOS_S bit (b3, STAT0,...). 0: A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the TCKLOS_S bit (b3, STAT0,...) will set the TCKLOS_IS bit (b3, INTS0,...) to ‘1’. (default) 1: Any transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’ on the TCKLOS_S bit (b3, STAT0,...) will set the TCKLOS_IS bit (b3, INTS0,...) to ‘1’. This bit selects the transition edge of the TLOS_S bit (b2, STAT0,...). 0: A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the TLOS_S bit (b2, STAT0,...) will set the TLOS_IS bit (b2, INTS0,...) to ‘1’. (default) 1: Any transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’ on the TLOS_S bit (b2, STAT0,...) will set the TLOS_IS bit (b2, INTS0,...) to ‘1’. This bit selects the transition edge of the LLOS_S bit (b0, STAT0,...) and the SLOS_S bit (b1, STAT0,...). 0: A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the LLOS_S bit (b0, STAT0,...) / the SLOS_S bit (b1, STAT0,...) will set the LLOS_IS bit (b0, INTS0,...) / the SLOS_IS bit (b1, INTS0,...) to ‘1’ respectively. (default) 1: Any transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’ on the LLOS_S bit (b0, STAT0,...) / the SLOS_S bit (b1, STAT0,...) will set the LLOS_IS bit (b0, INTS0,...) / the SLOS_IS bit (b1, INTS0,...) to ‘1’ respectively. This bit selects the transition edge of the IBA_S bit (b1, STAT1,...) and the IBD_S bit (b0, STAT1,...). 0: A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the IBA_S bit (b1, STAT1,...) / the IBD_S bit (b0, STAT1,...) will set the IBA_IS bit (b1, INTS1,...) / the IBD_IS bit (b0, INTS1,...) to ‘1’ respectively. (default) 1: Any transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’ on the IBA_S bit (b1, STAT1,...) / the IBD_S bit (b0, STAT1,...) will set the IBA_IS bit (b1, INTS1,...) / the IBD_IS bit (b0, INTS1,...) to ‘1’ respectively. Programming Information 101 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT INTM0 - Interrupt Mask Register 0 Address: 01BH, 05BH, 09BH, 0DBH, 11BH, 15BH, 19BH, 1DBH, (CH1~CH8) 21BH, 25BH, 29BH, 2DBH, 31BH, 35BH, 39BH, 3DBH, (CH9~CH16) 7DBH (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: FFH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DAC_IM TJA_IM RJA_IM TOC_IM TCKLOS_IM TLOS_IM SLOS_IM LLOS_IM Bit Name 7 DAC_IM 6 TJA_IM 5 RJA_IM 4 TOC_IM 3 TCKLOS_IM 2 TLOS_IM 1 SLOS_IM 0 LLOS_IM Programming Information Description This bit is the waveform amplitude overflow interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the TJA FIFO overflow and underflow interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the RJA FIFO overflow and underflow interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the Line Driver TOC interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the TCLKn missing interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the TLOS interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the SLOS interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the LLOS interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) 102 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT INTM1 - Interrupt Mask Register 1 Address: 01CH, 05CH, 09CH, 0DCH, 11CH, 15CH, 19CH, 1DCH, (CH1~CH8) 21CH, 25CH, 29CH, 2DCH, 31CH, 35CH, 39CH, 3DCH, (CH9~CH16) 7DCH (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: EFH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SAIS_IM LAIS_IM PA_IM - - - IBA_IM IBD_IM Bit Name 7 SAIS_IM 6 LAIS_IM 5 PA_IM 4-2 1 IBA_IM 0 IBD_IM Programming Information Description This bit is the SAIS interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the LAIS interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the PRBS/ARB pattern synchronization interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) Reserved. This bit is the activate IB code interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the deactivate IB code interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) 103 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT INTM2 - Interrupt Mask Register 2 Address: 01DH, 05DH, 09DH, 0DDH, 11DH, 15DH, 19DH, 1DDH, (CH1~CH8) 21DH, 25DH, 29DH, 2DDH, 31DH, 35DH, 39DH, 3DDH, (CH9~CH16) 7DDH (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 3FH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - SBPV_IM LBPV_IM SEXZ_IM LEXZ_IM ERR_IM CNTOV_IM Bit Name 7-6 5 SBPV_IM 4 LBPV_IM 3 SEXZ_IM 2 LEXZ_IM 1 ERR_IM 0 CNTOV_IM Programming Information Description Reserved. This bit is the SBPV interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the LBPV interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the SEXZ interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the LEXZ interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the PRBS/ARB error interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) This bit is the ERRCH and ERRCL registers overflow interrupt mask. 0: Interrupt is enabled. 1: Interrupt is masked. (default) 104 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT STAT0 - Status Register 0 Address: 01EH, 05EH, 09EH, 0DEH, 11EH, 15EH, 19EH, 1DEH, (CH1~CH8) 21EH, 25EH, 29EH, 2DEH, 31EH, 35EH, 39EH, 3DEH, (CH9~CH16) 7DEH (CH0) Type: Read Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AUTOLP_S - - TOC_S TCKLOS_S TLOS_S SLOS_S LLOS_S Bit Name 7 AUTOLP_S 6-5 4 TOC_S 3 TCKLOS_S 2 TLOS_S 1 SLOS_S 0 LLOS_S Programming Information Description This bit indicates the automatic Digital/Remote Loopback status. 0: Out of automatic Digital/Remote Loopback. (default) 1: In automatic Digital/Remote Loopback. Reserved. This bit indicates the TOC status. 0: No TOC is detected. (default) 1: TOC is detected. This bit indicates the TCLKn missing status. 0: TCLKn is not missing. (default) 1: TCLKn is missing. This bit indicates the TLOS status. 0: No TLOS is detected. (default) 1: TLOS is detected. This bit indicates the SLOS status. 0: No SLOS is detected. (default) 1: SLOS is detected. This bit indicates the LLOS status. 0: No LLOS is detected. (default) 1: LLOS is detected. 105 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT STAT1 - Status Register 1 Address: 01FH, 05FH, 09FH, 0DFH, 11FH, 15FH, 19FH, 1DFH, (CH1~CH8) 21FH, 25FH, 29FH, 2DFH, 31FH, 35FH, 39FH, 3DFH, (CH9~CH16) 7DFH (CH0) Type: Read Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SAIS_S LAIS_S PA_S - - - IBA_S IBD_S Bit Name Description 7 SAIS_S 6 LAIS_S 5 PA_S 4-2 1 IBA_S 0 IBD_S This bit indicates the SAIS status. 0: No SAIS is detected. (default) 1: SAIS is detected. This bit indicates the LAIS status. 0: No LAIS is detected. (default) 1: LAIS is detected. This bit indicates the PRBS/ARB pattern synchronization status. 0: The PRBS/ARB pattern is out of synchronization. (default) 1: The PRBS/ARB pattern is in synchronization. Reserved. This bit indicates the activate IB code status. 0: No activate IB code is detected. (default) 1: Activate IB code is detected for more than 40 ms when the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...) is ‘0’ or activate IB code is detected for more than 5.1 sec. when the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...) is ‘1’. This bit indicates the deactivate IB code status. 0: No deactivate IB code is detected. (default) 1: Deactivate IB code is detected for more than 40 ms (in T1/J1 mode) / 30 ms (in E1 mode) when the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...) is ‘0’ or deactivate IB code is detected for more than 5.1 sec. when the AUTOLP bit (b3, LOOP,...) is ‘1’. Programming Information 106 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT INTS0 - Interrupt Status Register 0 Address: 020H, 060H, 0A0H, 0E0H, 120H, 160H, 1A0H, 1E0H, (CH1~CH8) 220H, 260H, 2A0H, 2E0H, 320H, 360H, 3A0H, 3E0H, (CH9~CH16) 7E0H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DAC_IS TJA_IS RJA_IS TOC_IS TCKLOS_IS TLOS_IS SLOS_IS LLOS_IS Bit Name Description 7 DAC_IS 6 TJA_IS 5 RJA_IS 4 TOC_IS 3 TCKLOS_IS 2 TLOS_IS 1 SLOS_IS 0 LLOS_IS This bit indicates the interrupt status of the waveform amplitude overflow. 0: No waveform amplitude overflow interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: Waveform amplitude overflow interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the TJA FIFO overflow or underflow. 0: No TJA FIFO overflow or underflow interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: TJA FIFO overflow or underflow interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the RJA FIFO overflow or underflow. 0: No RJA FIFO overflow or underflow interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: RJA FIFO overflow or underflow interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the Line Driver TOC. 0: No TOC interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: TOC interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. When the TOC_IES bit (b4, INTES,...) is ‘0’, a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the TOC_S bit (b4, STAT0,...) set this bit to ‘1’; when the TOC_IES bit (b4, INTES,...) is ‘1’, any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the TOC_S bit (b4, STAT0,...) set this bit to ‘1’. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the TCLKn missing. 0: No TCLKn missing interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: TCLKn missing interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. When the TCKLOS_IES bit (b3, INTES,...) is ‘0’, a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the TCKLOS_S bit (b3, STAT0,...) set this bit to ‘1’; when the TCKLOS_IES bit (b3, INTES,...) is ‘1’, any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the TCKLOS_S bit (b3, STAT0,...) set this bit to ‘1’. This bit indicates the interrupt status of TLOS. 0: No TLOS interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: TLOS interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. When the TLOS_IES bit (b2, INTES,...) is ‘0’, a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the TLOS_S bit (b2, STAT0,...) set this bit to ‘1’; when the TLOS_IES bit (b2, INTES,...) is ‘1’, any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the TLOS_S bit (b2, STAT0,...) set this bit to ‘1’. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the SLOS. 0: No SLOS interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: SLOS interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. When the LOS_IES bit (b1, INTES,...) is ‘0’, a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the SLOS_S bit (b1, STAT0,...) set this bit to ‘1’; when the LOS_IES bit (b1, INTES,...) is ‘1’, any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the SLOS_S bit (b1, STAT0,...) set this bit to ‘1’. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the LLOS. 0: No LLOS interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: LLOS interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. When the LOS_IES bit (b1, INTES,...) is ‘0’, a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the LLOS_S bit (b0, STAT0,...) set this bit to ‘1’; when the LOS_IES bit (b1, INTES,...) is ‘1’, any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the LLOS_S bit (b0, STAT0,...) set this bit to ‘1’. Programming Information 107 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT INTS1 - Interrupt Status Register 1 Address: 021H, 061H, 0A1H, 0E1H, 121H, 161H, 1A1H, 1E1H, (CH1~CH8) 221H, 261H, 2A1H, 2E1H, 321H, 361H, 3A1H, 3E1H, (CH9~CH16) 7E1H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SAIS_IS LAIS_IS PA_IS - - - IBA_IS IBD_IS Bit Name Description 7 SAIS_IS 6 LAIS_IS 5 PA_IS 4-2 1 IBA_IS 0 IBD_IS This bit indicates the interrupt status of the SAIS. 0: No SAIS interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: SAIS interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. When the AIS_IES bit (b6, INTES,...) is ‘0’, a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the SAIS_S bit (b7, STAT1,...) set this bit to ‘1’; when the AIS_IES bit (b6, INTES,...) is ‘1’, any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the SAIS_S bit (b7, STAT1,...) set this bit to ‘1’. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the LAIS. 0: No LAIS interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: LAIS interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. When the AIS_IES bit (b6, INTES,...) is ‘0’, a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the LAIS_S bit (b6, STAT1,...) set this bit to ‘1’; when the AIS_IES bit (b6, INTES,...) is ‘1’, any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the LAIS_S bit (b6, STAT1,...) set this bit to ‘1’. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the PRBS/ARB pattern synchronization. 0: No PRBS/ARB pattern synchronization interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: PRBS/ARB pattern synchronization interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. When the PA_IES bit (b5, INTES,...) is ‘0’, a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the PA_S bit (b5, STAT1,...) set this bit to ‘1’; when the PA_IES bit (b5, INTES,...) is ‘1’, any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the PA_S bit (b5, STAT1,...) set this bit to ‘1’. Reserved. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the activate IB code. 0: No activate IB code interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: Activate IB code interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. When the IB_IES bit (b0, INTES,...) is ‘0’, a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the IBA_S bit (b1, STAT1,...) set this bit to ‘1’; when the IB_IES bit (b0, INTES,...) is ‘1’, any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the IBA_S bit (b1, STAT1,...) set this bit to ‘1’. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the deactivate IB code. 0: No deactivate IB code interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: Deactivate IB code interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. When the IB_IES bit (b0, INTES,...) is ‘0’, a transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on the IBD_S bit (b0, STAT1,...) set this bit to ‘1’; when the IB_IES bit (b0, INTES,...) is ‘1’, any transition (from ‘0’ to ‘1’ or from ‘1’ to ‘0’) on the IBD_S bit (b0, STAT1,...) set this bit to ‘1’. Programming Information 108 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT INTS2 - Interrupt Status Register 2 Address: 022H, 062H, 0A2H, 0E2H, 122H, 162H, 1A2H, 1E2H, (CH1~CH8) 222H, 262H, 2A2H, 2E2H, 322H, 362H, 3A2H, 3E2H, (CH9~CH16) 7E2H (CH0) Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - SBPV_IS LBPV_IS SEXZ_IS LEXZ_IS ERR_IS CNTOV_IS Bit Name 7-6 5 SBPV_IS 4 LBPV_IS 3 SEXZ_IS 2 LEXZ_IS 1 ERR_IS 0 CNTOV_IS Programming Information Description Reserved. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the SBPV. 0: No SBPV interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: SBPV interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the LBPV. 0: No LBPV interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: LBPV interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the SEXZ. 0: No SEXZ interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: SEXZ interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the LEXZ. 0: No LEXZ interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: LEXZ interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the PRBS/ARB error. 0: No PRBS/ARB error interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: PRBS/ARB error interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. This bit indicates the interrupt status of the ERRCH and ERRCL registers overflow. 0: No ERRCH or ERRCL register overflow interrupt is generated; or a ‘1’ is written to this bit. (default) 1: ERRCH and ERRCL registers overflow interrupt is generated and is reported by the INT pin. 109 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT ERRCL - Error Counter Low-Byte Register Address: 023H, 063H, 0A3H, 0E3H, 123H, 163H, 1A3H, 1E3H, (CH1~CH8) 223H, 263H, 2A3H, 2E3H, 323H, 363H, 3A3H, 3E3H, (CH9~CH16) 7E3H (CH0) Type: Read Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ERRC7 ERRC6 ERRC5 ERRC4 ERRC3 ERRC2 ERRC1 ERRC0 Bit Name Description 7-0 ERRC[7:0] These bits, together with the ERRC[15:8] bits, reflect the accumulated error number in the internal Error Counter. They are updated automatically or manually, as determined by the CNT_MD bit (b1, ERR,...). They should be read in the next round of error counting; otherwise, they will be overwritten. ERRCH - Error Counter High-Byte Register Address: 024H, 064H, 0A4H, 0E4H, 124H, 164H, 1A4H, 1E4H, (CH1~CH8) 224H, 264H, 2A4H, 2E4H, 324H, 364H, 3A4H, 3E4H, (CH9~CH16) 7E4H (CH0) Type: Read Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ERRC15 ERRC14 ERRC13 ERRC12 ERRC11 ERRC10 ERRC9 ERRC8 Bit Name 7-0 ERRC[15:8] Programming Information Description (Refer to the description of the ERRCL register.) 110 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT JM - Jitter Measurement Configuration For Channel 0 Register Address: 7E5H Type: Read / Write Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - - JM_STOP JM_MD JM_BW Bit Name Description 7-3 2 JM_STOP 1 JM_MD 0 JM_BW Reserved. This bit is valid only when the JM_MD bit (b1, JM) is ‘0’. A transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’ on this bit updates the JIT_PH, JIT_PL and JIT_NH, JIT_NL registers. This bit must be cleared before the next round. This bit selects the jitter measurement period. 0: The period is determined manually by setting the JM_STOP bit (b2, JM). (default) 1: The period is one second automatically. This bit selects the bandwidth of the measured jitter. 0: 10 Hz ~ 40 KHz (in T1/J1 mode) / 20 Hz ~ 100 KHz (in E1 mode). (default) 1: 8 KHz ~ 40 KHz (in T1/J1 mode) / 18 KHz ~ 100 KHz (in E1 mode). JIT_PL - Positive Peak Jitter Measurement Low-Byte Register Address: 7E6H Type: Read Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 JIT_P7 JIT_P6 JIT_P5 JIT_P4 JIT_P3 JIT_P2 JIT_P1 JIT_P0 Bit Name Description 7-0 JIT_P[7:0] These bits, together with the JIT_P[11:8] bits, reflect the greatest positive peak value of the demodulated jitter signal which is measured by channel 0. They are updated automatically or manually, as determined by the JM_MD bit (b1, JM). They should be read in the next round of jitter measurement; otherwise, they will be overwritten. The relationship between the greatest positive peak value and the indication in these bits is: Positive Peak = [JIT_PH, JIT_PL] / 16 (UIpp) JIT_PH - Positive Peak Jitter Measurement High-Byte Register Address: 7E7H Type: Read Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - JIT_P11 JIT_P10 JIT_P9 JIT_P8 Bit Name 7-4 3-0 JIT_P[11:8] Programming Information Description Reserved. (Refer to the description of the JIT_PL register.) 111 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT JIT_NL - Negative Peak Jitter Measurement Low-Byte Register Address: 7E8H Type: Read Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 JIT_N7 JIT_N6 JIT_N5 JIT_N4 JIT_N3 JIT_N2 JIT_N1 JIT_N0 Bit Name Description 7-0 JIT_N[7:0] These bits, together with the JIT_N[11:8] bits, reflect the greatest negative peak value of the demodulated jitter signal which is measured by channel 0. They are updated automatically or manually, as determined by the JM_MD bit (b1, JM). They should be read in the next round of jitter measurement; otherwise, they will be overwritten. The relationship between the greatest negative peak value and the indication in these bits is: Negative Peak = [JIT_NH, JIT_NL] / 16 (UIpp) JIT_NH - Negative Peak Jitter Measurement High-Byte Register Address: 7E9H Type: Read Default Value: 00H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - JIT_N11 JIT_N10 JIT_N9 JIT_N8 Bit Name 7-4 3-0 JIT_N[11:8] Programming Information Description Reserved. (Refer to the description of the JIT_NL register.) 112 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 6 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT JTAG Data Input (TDI) pin, and shifted out of the registers via the Test Data Output (TDO) pin. Both TDI and TDO are clocked at a rate determined by TCK. The IDT82P2816 supports the digital Boundary Scan Specification as described in the IEEE 1149.1 standards. The JTAG boundary scan registers include BSR (Boundary Scan Register), DIR (Device Identification Register), BR (Bypass Register) and IR (Instruction Register). These will be described in the following pages. Refer to Figure-45 for architecture. The boundary scan architecture consists of data and instruction registers plus a Test Access Port (TAP) controller. The control of the TAP is achieved through signals applied to the Test Mode Select (TMS) and Test Clock (TCK) input pins. Data is shifted into the registers via the Test BSR (Boundary Scan Register) DIR (Device Identification Register) MUX TDI MUX BR (Bypass Register) IR (Instruction Register) TMS TRST TCK TDO Control TAP (Test Access Port) Controller Select Output Enable Figure-45 JTAG Architecture 6.1 JTAG INSTRUCTION REGISTER (IR) 6.2.3 The bidirectional ports interface to 2 boundary scan cells: - In cell: The input cell is observable only. - Out cell: The output cell is controllable and observable. The IR with instruction decode block is used to select the test to be executed or the data register to be accessed or both. The instructions include: EXTEST, SAMPLE/PRELOAD, IDCODE, BYPASS, CLAMP and HIGHZ. 6.2 JTAG DATA REGISTER 6.2.1 DEVICE IDENTIFICATION REGISTER (IDR) The IDR can be set to define the Version, the Part Number, the Manufacturer Identity and a fixed bit. 6.2.2 BYPASS REGISTER (BYP) The BYP consists of a single bit. It can provide a serial path between the TDI input and the TDO output. Bypassing the BYR will reduce test access times. JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN REGISTER (BSR) 6.3 TEST ACCESS PORT (TAP) CONTROLLER The TAP controller is a 16-state synchronous state machine. The states include: Test Logic Reset, Run-Test/Idle, Select-DR-Scan, Capture-DR, Shift-DR, Exit1-DR, Pause-DR, Exit2-DR, Update-DR, Select-IR-Scan, Capture-IR, Shift-IR, Exit1-IR, Pause-IR, Exit2-IR and Update-IR. Figure-46 shows the state diagram. Note that the figure contains two main branches to access either the data or instruction registers. The value shown next to each state transition in this figure states the value present at TMS at each rising edge of TCK. 113 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 1 Test-logic Reset 0 0 1 Run Test/Idle 1 Select-DR 0 1 1 Select-IR 0 1 Capture-DR Capture-IR 0 0 0 0 Shift-DR Shift-IR 1 1 1 1 Exit1-DR Exit1-IR 0 0 0 0 Pause-DR Pause-IR 1 0 1 0 Exit2-DR Exit2-IR 1 1 Update-DR 1 Update-IR 0 1 0 Figure-46 JTAG State Diagram JTAG 114 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 7 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT THERMAL MANAGEMENT The device is designed to operate over the industry temperature range -40°C ~ +85°C. To ensure the functionality and reliability of the device, the maximum junction temperature, Tjmax, should not exceed 125°C. In some applications, the device will consume more power and a thermal solution should be provided to ensure the junction temperature Tj does not exceed Tjmax. Below is a table listing thermal data for the IDT82P2816. Package 416-pin PBGA θJC (°C/W) 1 θJB (°C/W) 2 6.52 11.37 θJA (°C/W) 3 Airflow (m/s) 19.0 0 15.1 1 13.6 2 12.8 3 12.2 4 12.0 5 Note: 1. Junction-to-Case Thermal Resistance 2. Junction-to-Board Thermal Resistance 3. Junction-to-Ambient Thermal Resistance 7.1 7.2 EXAMPLE OF JUNCTION TEMPERATURE CALCULATION Assume: TA = 85 °C θJA = 15.1 °C/W (airflow: 1 m/s) P = 1.55 W (E1 120 Ω, 100% ones, External Impedance matching) The junction temperature Tj can be calculated as follows: Tj = TA + P * θJA = 85 °C + 1.55 W X 15.1 °C/W = 108.4 °C The junction temperature of 108.4 °C is below the maximum junction temperature of 125 °C, so no extra heat enhancement is required. In some operation environments, the calculated junction temperature might exceed the maximum junction temperature of 125 °C and an external thermal solution such as a heatsink is required. 7.3 A heatsink is expanding the surface area of the device to which it is attached. θJA is now a combination of device case and heatsink thermal resistance, as the heat flowing from the die junction to ambient goes through the package and the heatsink. θJA can be calculated as follows: Equation 2: θJA = θJC + θHA Where: θJC = Junction-to-Case (heatsink) Thermal Resistance θHA = Heatsink-to-Ambient Thermal Resistance JUNCTION TEMPERATURE Junction temperature Tj is the temperature of package typically at the geographical center of the chip where the device's electrical circuits are. It can be calculated as follows: Equation 1: Tj = TA + P * θJA Where: θJA = Junction-to-Ambient Thermal Resistance of the package Tj = Junction Temperature For the IDT82P2816, θJC is 6.52 °C/W. θHA determines which heatsink can be selected to ensure the junction temperature does not exceed Tjmax. According to Equation 1 and 2, the heatsink-to-ambient thermal resistance θHA can be calculated as follows: Equation 3: θHA = (Tj - TA) / P - θJC TA = Ambient Temperature Assume: P = Device Power Consumption Tj = 125 °C (Tjmax) For the IDT82P2816, the above values are: θJA = 19.0 °C/W (when airflow rate is 0 m/s. See the above table ) TA = 85 °C P = 2.87 W (E1 75 Ω, 100% ones, Fully Internal Impedance matching) θJC = 6.52 °C/W Tjmax = 125 °C TA = - 40 °C ~ 85 °C P = Refer to Section 8.3 Device Power Consumption and Dissipation (Typical) 1 HEATSINK EVALUATION The Heatsink-to-Ambient thermal resistance θHA can be calculated as follows: θHA = (125 °C - 85 °C ) / 2.87 W - 6.52 °C/W = 7.42 °C/W That is, if a heatsink whose heatsink-to-ambient thermal resistance θHA is below or equal to 7.42 °C/W is used in such operation environment, the junction temperature will not exceed the maximum junction temperature. Thermal Management 115 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8 PHYSICAL AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 8.1 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Symbol Parameter Min Max Unit VDDD Digital Core Power Supply -0.5 2.2 V VDDA Analog Core Power Supply -0.5 4.6 V VDDIO I/O Power Supply -0.5 4.6 V VDDT0~16 Power Supply for Transmitter Driver -0.5 4.6 V VDDR0~16 Power Supply for Receiver -0.5 4.6 V Input Voltage, Any Digital Pin GND - 0.5 6 V Input Voltage, Any RTIP and RRING pin 1 GND - 0.5 VDDR + 0.5 V Vin 2000 ESD Voltage, Any Pin 2 Transient Latch-up Current, Any Pin V 100 mA 10 mA DC Input Current, Any Analog Pin 3 ±100 mA Pd Maximum Power Dissipation in Package 2.11 4 W Tj Junction Temperature 125 °C Ts Storage Temperature +150 °C Iin -10 Input Current, Any Digital Pin 3 -65 Note: 1. Reference to ground. 2. Human body model. 3. Constant input current. 4. If device power consumption exceeds this value, a heatsink must be used. Refer to Chapter 7 Thermal Management. Caution: Exceeding the above values may cause permanent damage. Functional operation under these conditions is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended period may affect device reliability. Physical And Electrical Specifications 116 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 8.2 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS Symbol Top Parameter Min Typ. Max Unit 85 1 °C Operating Temperature Range -40 VDDIO Digital I/O Power Supply 3.13 3.3 3.47 V VDDA Analog Core Power Supply 3.13 3.3 3.47 V VDDD Digital Core Power Supply 1.71 1.8 1.89 V VDDT Power Supply for Transmitter Driver 3.13 3.3 3.47 V VDDR Power Supply for Receiver 3.13 3.3 3.47 V VIL Input Low Voltage -0.5 0.8 V VIH Input High Voltage 2.0 VDDIO+0.5 V Note: 1. An external thermal solution such as heatsink may be required depending on the mode of operation. Refer to Chapter 7 Thermal Management. Physical And Electrical Specifications 117 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 8.3 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT DEVICE POWER CONSUMPTION AND DISSIPATION (TYPICAL) 1 Total Device Power Dissipation (for Thermal Consideration, W) Total Consumption (W) Mode E1/120 Ω E1/75 Ω T1/100 Ω J1/110 Ω Parameter Per-Channel Power Down Saving (mW) 2 1.8 V 3.3 V Total Fully Internal R120IN=1 3 Partially Internal R120IN=0 4 External 5 Fully Internal R120IN=1 3 Partially Internal R120IN=0 4 External 5 PRBS 0.18 1.83 2.01 2.01 1.57 1.28 80 60 40 100% ones 0.18 2.45 2.63 2.63 1.99 1.55 130 90 70 PRBS 0.18 1.97 2.15 2.15 1.88 1.28 90 60 50 100% ones 0.18 2.69 2.87 2.87 2.48 1.59 150 120 80 QRSS 0.14 2.05 2.19 2.19 1.76 1.67 100 80 60 100% ones 0.14 2.96 3.10 3.10 2.46 2.33 160 120 90 QRSS 0.14 1.98 2.12 2.12 1.69 1.65 100 70 60 100% ones 0.14 2.81 2.95 2.95 2.31 2.25 150 110 90 Note: 1. Test conditions: VDDx (typical) at 25 °C operating temperature (ambient). 2. The R_OFF bit (b5, RCF0,...) and T_OFF bit (b5, TCF0,...) are set to ‘1’ to enable per-channel power down. 3. The transmitter is in Internal Impedance Matching mode and the receiver is in Fully Internal Impedance Matching mode. That is, the R120IN bit (b4, RCF0,...) is set to ‘1’. And the T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) and R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) are set according to different cable conditions. 4. The transmitter is in Internal Impedance Matching mode and the receiver is in Partially Internal Impedance Matching mode. That is, the R120IN bit (b4, RCF0,...) is set to ‘0’. And the T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) and R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) are set according to different cable conditions. 5. For E1 mode, both the transmitter and the receiver are in External Impedance Matching mode. That is, the T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) are set to ‘111’ and the R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) are set to ‘1xx’. For T1/J1 mode, as the transmitter External Impedance Matching mode is not supported, the transmitter is in Internal Impedance Matching mode and the receiver is in Internal Impedance Matching mode. That is, the T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) are set according to different cable conditions and the R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) are set to ‘1xx’. Physical And Electrical Specifications 118 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 8.4 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT DEVICE POWER CONSUMPTION AND DISSIPATION (MAXIMUM) 1 Total Device Power Dissipation (for Thermal Consideration, W) Total Consumption (W) Mode E1/120 Ω E1/75 Ω T1/100 Ω J1/110 Ω Parameter 1.89 V 3.47 V Total Fully Internal R120IN=1 2 Partially Internal R120IN=0 3 External 4 PRBS 0.22 2.01 2.23 2.23 1.79 1.49 100% ones 0.22 2.64 2.85 2.85 2.21 1.77 PRBS 0.22 2.15 2.37 2.37 2.10 1.50 100% ones 0.22 2.87 3.09 3.09 2.69 1.81 QRSS 0.17 2.22 2.39 2.39 1.96 1.87 100% ones 0.17 3.16 3.33 3.33 2.69 2.56 QRSS 0.17 2.15 2.32 2.32 1.89 1.85 100% ones 0.17 3.00 3.17 3.17 2.53 2.48 Note: 1. Test conditions: VDDx (maximum) at 85 °C operating temperature (ambient). 2. The transmitter is in Internal Impedance Matching mode and the receiver is in Fully Internal Impedance Matching mode. That is, the R120IN bit (b4, RCF0,...) is set to ‘1’. And the T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) and R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) are set according to different cable conditions. 3. The transmitter is in Internal Impedance Matching mode and the receiver is in Partially Internal Impedance Matching mode. That is, the R120IN bit (b4, RCF0,...) is set to ‘0’. And the T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) and R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) are set according to different cable conditions. 4. For E1 mode, both the transmitter and the receiver are in External Impedance Matching mode. That is, the T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) are set to ‘111’ and the R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) are set to ‘1xx’. For T1/J1 mode, as the transmitter External Impedance Matching mode is not supported, the transmitter is in Internal Impedance Matching mode and the receiver is in Internal Impedance Matching mode. That is, the T_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, TCF0,...) are set according to different cable conditions and the R_TERM[2:0] bits (b2~0, RCF0,...) are set to ‘1xx’. Physical And Electrical Specifications 119 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 8.5 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT D.C. CHARACTERISTICS @ TA = -40 to +85 °C, VDDIO = 3.3 V ± 5%, VDDD = 1.8 V ± 5% Symbol Parameter Min VOL Output Low Voltage VOH Output High Voltage 2.4 VT+ Schmitt Trigger Input Low to High Threshold 1.8 VT- Schmitt Trigger Input High to Low Threshold Rpu Internal Pull-up /Pull-down Resistor 50 IIL Input Low Current IIH Input High Current Cin Typ. Max Unit Test Conditions 0.40 V VDDIO = 3.13 V, IOL = 4 mA, 8 mA VDDIO V VDDIO = 3.13 V, IOH = 4 mA, 8 mA V 0.7 V 70 115 KΩ -1 0 +1 µA VIL = GNDD -1 0 +1 µA VIH = VDDIO Input Digital Pin Capacitance 10 pF Cout Output Load Capacitance 50 pF Cout Output Load Capacitance (bus pins) 100 pF IZL Leakage Current of Digital Output in High-Z mode -10 10 µA ZOH Output High-Z on TTIPn, TRINGn pins 10 Physical And Electrical Specifications 120 GNDIO < VO < VDDIO KΩ February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 8.6 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT E1 RECEIVER ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Parameter Min Typ. Receiver Sensitivity of Receive Differential mode with Cable Loss @ 1024 KHz 15 Receiver Sensitivity of Receive Single Ended mode with Cable Loss @ 1024 kHz 12 Signal to Noise Interference Margin Analog LOS Level (Normal Mode) 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 LOS hysteresis 0.25 Analog LOS Level ALOS[2:0] (Line Monitor Mode) 000 001 (default) 010 011 1xx (reserved) dB 1.0 1.4 1.8 2.2 LOS hysteresis Unit Test Conditions dB -14 ALOS[2:0] 000 001 (default) 010 011 100 101 110 111 with Nominal Pulse Amplitude of 3.0 V for 120 Ω and 2.37 V for 75 Ω termination, adding -18 dB interference signal. dB @cable loss 0-6 dB Vpp In Differential mode, measured between RTIP and RRING pins. In Singled Ended mode, measured between RTIP and GNDA pins Refer to Table-17 for LLOS Criteria Declare and Clear. Vpp Measured on the line with the monitor gain set by the MG[1:0] bits (b1~0, RCF2,...) equal to the resistive attenuation. Refer to Table-17 for LLOS Criteria Declare and Clear. 0.41 Allowable Consecutive Zeros before LOS: G.775 I.431 / ETSI300233 LOS Reset Max 32 2048 12.5 % ones Receive Intrinsic Jitter Input Jitter Tolerance: 1 Hz ~ 20 Hz 20 Hz ~ 2.4 KHz 18 KHz ~ 100 KHz 0.05 37 5 2 G.775, ETSI 300233 U.I. JA disabled; wide band U.I. U.I. U.I. G.823, with 6 dB Cable Attenuation Receiver Differential Input Impedance 2.6 KΩ Receiver Common Mode Input Impedance to GND 1.6 KΩ Receiver Single Ended mode Input Impedance to GND 3.1 KΩ The RRINGn pins are open. dB dB dB G.703 U.I. U.I. U.I. JA Disabled Receive Return Loss: 51 KHz ~ 102 KHz 102 KHz ~ 2.048 MHz 2.048 MHz ~ 3.072 MHz Receive Path Delay: Single Rail Dual Rail NRZ Dual Rail RZ Physical And Electrical Specifications 12 18 14 6.6 1.8 1.5 121 @1024 KHz; Rx port is high-Z February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 8.7 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT T1/J1 RECEIVER ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Parameter Min Typ. Receiver Sensitivity of Receive Differential mode with Cable Loss @ 772 KHz 15 Receiver Sensitivity of Receive Single Ended mode with Cable Loss @ 772 KHz 12 Signal to Noise Interference Margin Analog LOS Level (Normal Mode) Analog LOS Level (Line Monitor Mode) LOS hysteresis 0.25 ALOS[2:0] 000 001 (default) 010 011 1xx (reserved) 1.0 1.4 1.8 2.2 LOS hysteresis 0.41 dB with Nominal Pulse Amplitude of 3.0 V for 100 Ω termination, adding -18 dB interference signal. Vpp In Differential mode, measured between RTIP and RRING pins. In Singled Ended mode, measured between RTIP and GNDA pins Refer to Table-17 for LLOS Criteria Declare and Clear. Vpp Measured on the line with the monitor gain set by the MG[1:0] bits (b1~0, RCF2,...) equal to the resistive attenuation. Refer to Table-17 for LLOS Criteria Declare and Clear. 175 1544 12.5 % ones Receive Intrinsic Jitter Input Jitter Tolerance: 0.1 Hz ~ 1 Hz 4.9 Hz ~ 300 Hz 10 KHz ~ 100 KHz Test Conditions dB 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 Allowable Consecutive Zeros before LOS: T1.231 - 1993 I.431 Unit dB -14 ALOS[2:0] 000 001 (default) 010 011 100 101 110 111 LOS Reset Max 0.05 138.0 28.0 0.4 G.775, ETSI 300233 U.I. JA disabled; Wide band U.I. U.I. U.I. AT&T62411 Receiver Differential Input Impedance 3.1 KΩ Receiver Common Mode Input Impedance to GND 2.2 KΩ Receiver Single Ended mode Input Impedance to GND 4 KΩ The RRINGn pins are open. dB dB dB G.703 U.I. U.I. U.I. JA Disabled Receive Return Loss: 39 KHz ~ 77 KHz 77 KHz ~ 1.544 MHz 1.544 MHz ~ 2.316 MHz Receive Path Delay: Single Rail Dual Rail NRZ Dual Rail RZ Physical And Electrical Specifications 20 20 20 6.5 2.5 1.4 122 @772 KHz; Rx port is high-Z February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 8.8 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT E1 TRANSMITTER ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Parameter Output Pulse Amplitude: E1, 75 Ω load E1, 120 Ω load Zero (Space) Level: E1, 75 Ω load E1, 120 Ω load Transmit Amplitude Variation with Supply Min Typ. Max Unit 2.14 2.7 2.37 3.0 2.60 3.3 V V -0.237 -0.3 +0.237 0.3 V V -1 +1 % 200 mV 256 ns Difference between Pulse Sequences for 17 consecutive pulses (T1.102) Output Pulse Width at 50% of Nominal Amplitude 232 Ratio of the Amplitudes of Positive and Negative Pulses at the Center of the Pulse Interval (G.703) 0.95 1.05 Ratio of the Width of Positive and Negative Pulses at the Center of the Pulse Interval (G.703) 0.95 1.05 Transmit Analog LOS Level (TALOS) (Differential line interface) Transmit Analog LOS Level (TALOS) (Single Ended line interface) 244 TALOS[1:0] 00 01 (default) 10 11 1.2 0.9 0.6 0.4 TALOS hysteresis 0.08 TALOS[1:0] 00 01 (default) 10 11 0.61 0.48 0.32 0.24 TALOS hysteresis 0.04 Transmit Return Loss (G.703): 51 KHz ~ 102 KHz 102 KHz ~ 2.048 MHz 2.048 MHz ~ 3.072 MHz Test Conditions Differential Line Interface mode Differential Line Interface mode Vp Measured on the TTIP and TRING pins. Vp Measured on the TTIP pin. dB dB dB 8 14 10 Intrinsic Transmit Jitter 20 Hz ~ 100 KHz TCLK is jitter free 0.050 U.I. Transmit Path Delay: Single Rail Dual Rail NRZ Dual Rail RZ 8.5 4.5 4.4 U.I. U.I. U.I. JA is disabled Line Short Circuit Current 100 mAp Measured on pin Physical And Electrical Specifications 123 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 8.9 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT T1/J1 TRANSMITTER ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Parameter Output Pulse Amplitude Zero (Space) Level Transmit Amplitude Variation with Supply Min Typ. Max Unit 2.4 3.0 3.6 V -0.15 0.15 V -1 +1 % 200 mV 362 ns 20 ns Difference between Pulse Sequences for 17 consecutive pulses (T1.102) Output Pulse Width at 50% of Nominal Amplitude 338 350 Pulse Width Variation at the Half Amplitude (T1.102) Imbalance between Positive and Negative Pulses Amplitude (T1.102) Output Power Levels (T1.102-1993): @772 KHz @1544 KHz (Referenced to Power at 772 KHz) Transmit Analog LOS Level (TALOS) (Differential line interface) Transmit Analog LOS Level (TALOS) (Single Ended line interface) 0.95 1.05 12.6 -29 17.9 TALOS[1:0] 00 01 (default) 10 11 1.2 0.9 0.6 0.4 TALOS hysteresis 0.08 TALOS[1:0] 00 01 (default) 10 11 0.61 0.48 0.32 0.24 TALOS hysteresis 0.04 Transmit Return Loss (G.703): 39 KHz ~ 77 KHz 77 KHz ~ 1.544 MHz 1.544 MHz ~ 2.316 MHz 8 14 10 Test Conditions Differential Line Interface mode dBm dBm Vp Measured on the TTIP and TRING pins. Vp Measured on the TTIP pin. dB dB dB Intrinsic Transmit Jitter: 10 Hz ~ 8 KHz 8 KHz ~ 40 KHz 10 Hz ~ 40 KHz Wide Band 0.020 0.025 0.025 0.050 U.I.p-p U.I.p-p U.I.p-p U.I.p-p TCLK is jitter free Transmit Path Delay (JA is disabled): Single Rail Dual Rail NRZ Dual Rail RZ 8.2 4.1 4.3 U.I. U.I. U.I. JA is disabled Line Short Circuit Current 100 mAp Measure on pin Physical And Electrical Specifications 124 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.10 TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER TIMING CHARACTERISTICS Symbol Parameter Min MCLK Frequency: E1 T1/J1 Typ. Max 2.048 X n 1.544 X n (n = 1 ~ 8) Unit MHz MHz MCLK Tolerance -100 100 ppm MCLK Duty Cycle 30 70 % Transmit Path TCLK Frequency: E1 T1/J1 2.048 1.544 MHz MHz TCLK Tolerance -50 +50 ppm TCLK Duty Cycle 10 90 % t1 Transmit Data Setup Time 40 ns t2 Transmit Data Hold Time 40 ns Delay Time of OE low to Driver High-Z 1 Delay Time of TCLK low to Driver High-Z µs TBD µs +80 / -80 +180 / -180 ppm ppm Receive Path Clock Recovery Capture Range 1: E1 T1/J1 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 RCLK Duty Cycle 2 40 50 60 % RCLK Pulse Width 2: E1 T1/J1 457 607 488 648 519 689 ns ns RCLK Pulse Width Low Time: E1 T1/J1 203 259 244 324 285 389 ns ns RCLK Pulse Width High Time: E1 T1/J1 203 259 244 324 285 389 ns ns Rise/Fall Time 3 20 Receive Data Setup Time: E1 T1/J1 200 200 244 324 ns ns Receive Data Hold Time: E1 T1/J1 200 200 244 324 ns ns ns Note: 1. Relative to nominal frequency, MCLK = +100 or -100 ppm. 2. RCLK duty cycle width will vary depending on extent of the received pulse jitter displacement. Maximum and minimum RCLK duty cycles are for worst case jitter conditions (0.2 UI displacement for E1 per ITU G.823). 3. For all digital outputs. Cload = 15 pF. Physical And Electrical Specifications 125 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT TCLKn t1 t2 TDn/TDPn TDNn/TMFn Figure-47 Transmit Clock Timing Diagram t4 RCLK t6 t5 t7 t8 RDn/RDPn (RCK_ES = 0) RDNn/RMFn t7 t8 RDn/RDPn (RCK_ES = 1) RDNn/RMFn Figure-48 Receive Clock Timing Diagram Physical And Electrical Specifications 126 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.11 CLKE1 TIMING CHARACTERISTICS Symbol Parameter Min Typ. Max Unit CLKE1 outputs 2.048 MHz clock t1 CLKE1 Pulse Width 488 ns t2 CLKE1 Pulse Width High Time 232 244 256 ns t3 CLKE1 Pulse Width Low Time 232 244 256 ns t4 LLOS Data Setup Time 217 244 271 ns t5 LLOS Data Hold Time 217 244 271 ns CLKE1 outputs 8kHz clock t1 CLKE1 Pulse Width 125 µs t2 CLKE1 Pulse Width High Time 62.4 62.5 62.6 µs t3 CLKE1 Pulse Width Low Time 62.4 62.5 62.6 µs t4 LLOS Data Setup Time 62.38 62.5 62.62 µs t5 LLOS Data Hold Time 62.38 62.5 62.62 µs t1 CLKE1 t2 t3 t4 t5 LLOS Figure-49 CLKE1 Clock Timing Diagram Physical And Electrical Specifications 127 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.12 JITTER ATTENUATION CHARACTERISTICS Parameter Jitter Transfer Function Corner (-3 dB) Frequency: E1, 32/64/128-bit FIFO T1/J1, 32/64/128-bit FIFO Jitter Attenuator: E1 (G.736) T1/J1 (AT&T pub.62411) Min JA_BW = 0 JA_BW = 1 JA_BW = 0 JA_BW = 1 6.63 0.87 5 1.28 @ 3 Hz @ 40 Hz @ 400 Hz @ 100 KHz -0.5 -0.5 +19.5 +19.5 @ 1 Hz @ 20 Hz @ 1 KHz @ 1.4 KHz @ 70 KHz 0 0 +33.3 40 40 Jitter Attenuator Latency Delay: 32-bit FIFO 64-bit FIFO 128-bit FIFO Input Jitter Tolerance before FIFO Overflow or Underflow: 32-bit FIFO 64-bit FIFO 128-bit FIFO Physical And Electrical Specifications Typ. 128 Max Unit Hz Hz Hz Hz dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB 16 32 64 U.I. U.I. U.I. 28 56 120 U.I. U.I. U.I. February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Figure-50 E1 Jitter Tolerance Performance Figure-51 T1/J1 Jitter Tolerance Performance Physical And Electrical Specifications 129 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Figure-52 E1 Jitter Transfer Performance Figure-53 T1/J1 Jitter Transfer Performance Physical And Electrical Specifications 130 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.13 MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE TIMING write operation. Following the instruction, an 11-bit address is clocked in on SDI to specify the register. If the device is in a read operation, the data read from the specified register is output on SDO on the falling edge of SCLK (refer to Figure-54). If the device is in a write operation, the data written to the specified register is input on SDI following the address byte (refer to Figure-55). 8.13.1 SERIAL MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE A falling transition on CS indicates the start of a read/write operation, and a rising transition indicates the end of the operation. After CS is set to low, a 5-bit instruction on SDI is input to the device on the rising edge of SCLK. If the MSB is ‘1’, it is a read operation. If the MSB is ‘0’, it is a CS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 SCLK Instruction SDI Register Address A10 A9 A8 Don't Care R/W A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 High-Z SDO Don't-Care A1 A0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Figure-54 Read Operation in Serial Microprocessor Interface CS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 SCLK Instruction SDI R/W Don't Care Register Address A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 Data Byte A2 A1 A0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 High-Z SDO Figure-55 Write Operation in Serial Microprocessor Interface Physical And Electrical Specifications 131 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT Symbol Description Min. Max. Units 2.0 MHz fOP SCLK Frequency tCSH Minimum CS High Time 100 ns tCSS CS Setup Time 50 ns tCSD CS Hold Time 100 ns tCLD Clock Disable Time 50 ns tCLH Clock High Time 205 ns tCLL Clock Low Time 205 ns tDIS Data Setup Time 50 ns tDIH Data Hold Time 150 ns tPD Output Delay 150 ns tDF Output Disable Time 50 ns t CSH CS tCSS tCLH tCLL tCLD tCSD SCLK tDIS SDI tDIH Valid Input tPD SDO High-Z t Valid Output DF High-Z Figure-56 Timing Diagram Physical And Electrical Specifications 132 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.13.2 PARALLEL MOTOROLA NON-MULTIPLEXED MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE 8.13.2.1Read Cycle Specification Symbol Parameter tSAR Address to valid read setup time tRSW Valid read signal width tHAR Min MAX Units 5 ns 41 (T1/J1) / 38 (E1) or wait until ACK activated ns Address to valid read hold time 0 ns tRWV R/W available time after valid CS + DS signal falling edge 0 ns tRWH R/W hold time after valid CS + DS signal falling edge 36 (T1/J1) / 33 (E1) ns tPRD Data propagation delay after valid CS + DS signal falling edge tZRD Valid read negated to output High-Z 36 (T1/J1) / 33 (E1) ns 20 ns 5 tSAR tHAR A[x:0] Valid address tRSW DS + CS tRWV tRWH R/W tPRD D[7:0] tZRD Valid Data ACK Figure-57 Parallel Motorola Non-Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Read Cycle Physical And Electrical Specifications 133 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.13.2.2Write Cycle Specification Symbol Parameter Min tSAW Address to valid write setup time tWSW Valid write signal width tHAW Address to valid write hold time tRWV R/W available time after valid write signal falling edge tRWH R/W hold time after valid write signal falling edge MAX Units 0 ns 5 or wait until ACK activated ns 47 (T1/J1) / 35 (E1) ns 0 ns 5 or wait until ACK activated ns tDV Data available time before valid write signal rising edge 5 ns tDH Valid data hold time after valid write signal rising edge 5 ns tREC Recovery time from write cycle 5 ns tSAW tHAW A[x:0] Valid address tWSW tREC DS + CS tRWH tRWV R/W tDV D[7:0] tDH Valid Data ACK Figure-58 Parallel Motorola Non-Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Write Cycle Physical And Electrical Specifications 134 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.13.3 PARALLEL INTEL NON-MULTIPLEXED MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE 8.13.3.1Read Cycle Specification Symbol Parameter Min tSAR Address to valid read setup time tRSW Valid read signal width tHAR Address to valid read hold time tPRD Data propagation delay after valid read signal falling edge tZRD Valid read negated to output High-Z Units 5 ns 36 (T1/J1) / 33 (E1) or wait until RDY activated ns 0 ns 5 tSAR A[x:0] MAX 31 (T1/J1) / 28 (E1) ns 20 ns tHAR Valid address tRSW RD + CS tPRD D[7:0] tZRD Valid Data RDY Note: WR shall be tied to high. Figure-59 Parallel Intel Non-Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Read Cycle Physical And Electrical Specifications 135 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.13.3.2Write Cycle Specification Symbol Parameter tSAW Address to valid write setup time tWSW Valid write signal width tHAW Address to valid write hold time tDV Min MAX Units 0 ns 5 or wait until RDY activated ns 47 (T1/J1) / 35 (E1) ns Data available time before valid write signal rising edge 5 ns tDH Valid data hold time after valid write signal rising edge 5 ns tREC Recovery time from write cycle 5 ns tSAW A[x:0] tHAW Valid address tWSW tREC WR + CS tDV tDH Valid Data D[7:0] RDY Note: RD shall be tied to high. Figure-60 Parallel Intel Non-Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Write Cycle Physical And Electrical Specifications 136 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.13.4 PARALLEL MOTOROLA MULTIPLEXED MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE 8.13.4.1Read Cycle Specification Symbol Parameter Min MAX Units tASW Valid AS signal width 5 ns tRSW Valid read signal width 41 (T1/J1) / 38 (E1) or wait until ACK activated ns tCSD Valid DS + CS falling edge delay after AS 0 ns tRWV R/W available time after valid DS + CS signal falling edge 0 ns tRWH R/W hold time after valid DS + CS signal falling edge 36 (T1/J1) / 33 (E1) ns tVAS Valid address to AS setup time 5 ns tVAH Valid address to AS hold time 5 ns tPRD Data propagation delay after valid DS + CS signal falling edge tZRD Valid read negated to output High-Z before valid AS rising edge 36 (T1/J1) / 33 (E1) ns 20 ns 5 tRSW DS + CS tRWH tRWV R/W tASW tCSD AS tVAS D[7:0] tPRD tZRD Valid Data Valid address tVAH ACK Figure-61 Parallel Motorola Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Read Cycle Physical And Electrical Specifications 137 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.13.4.2Write Cycle Specification Symbol Parameter tASW Valid AS signal width tWSW Valid write signal width tHCW DS + CS to valid hold time tRWV Min MAX Units 5 ns 5 or wait until ACK activated ns 47 (T1/J1) / 35 (E1) ns R/W available time after valid write signal falling edge 0 ns tRWH R/W hold time after valid write signal falling edge 5 ns tCSD Valid DS + CS falling edge delay after AS 0 ns tVAS Valid address to AS setup time 5 ns tVAH Valid address to AS hold time 5 ns tASD Valid AS rising edge delay after DS + CS rising edge 5 ns tDV Data available time before valid write signal rising edge 5 ns tDH Valid data hold time after valid write signal rising edge before the next AS rising edge 5 ns tWSW tHCW DS + CS tRWH tRWV R/W tASW tCSD tASD AS tVAS D[7:0] ACK tDV Valid address tDH Valid Data tVAH Figure-62 Parallel Motorola Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Write Cycle Physical And Electrical Specifications 138 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.13.5 PARALLEL INTEL MULTIPLEXED MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE 8.13.5.1Read Cycle Specification Symbol Parameter Min MAX Units tAEW Valid ALE signal width 5 ns tRSW Valid read signal width 36 (T1/J1) / 33 (E1) or wait until RDY activated ns tCSD Valid RD + CS falling edge delay after ALE falling edge 0 ns tVAS Valid address to ALE setup time 5 ns tVAH Valid address to ALE hold time 5 ns tPRD Data propagation delay after valid read signal falling edge tZRD Valid read negated to output High-Z before valid ALE rising edge 31 (T1/J1) / 28 (E1) ns 20 ns 5 tRSW RD + CS tAEW tCSD ALE tVAS D[7:0] tPRD Valid address tZRD Valid Data tVAH RDY Note: WR shall be tied to high. Figure-63 Parallel Intel Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Read Cycle Physical And Electrical Specifications 139 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.13.5.2Write Cycle Specification Symbol Parameter Min MAX Units tAEW Valid ALE signal width 5 ns tWSW Valid write signal width 5 or wait until RDY activated ns tHCW WR + CS to valid hold time 47 (T1/J1) / 35 (E1) ns tCSD Valid WR + CS falling edge delay after ALE falling edge 0 ns tVAS Valid address to ALE setup time 5 ns tVAH Valid address to ALE hold time 5 ns tAED Valid ALE rising edge delay after WR + CS rising edge 5 ns tDV Data available time before valid write signal rising edge 5 ns tDH Valid data hold time after valid write signal rising edge before the next AS rising edge 5 ns tWSW tHCW WR + CS tAEW tCSD tAED ALE tVAS D[7:0] RDY tDV Valid address tDH Valid Data tVAH Note: RD shall be tied to high. Figure-64 Parallel Intel Multiplexed Microprocessor Interface Write Cycle Physical And Electrical Specifications 140 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT 8.14 JTAG TIMING CHARACTERISTICS Symbol Parameter Min Typ. Max Unit t1 TCK Period 100 ns t2 TMS to TCK Setup Time; TDI to TCK Setup Time 25 ns t3 TCK to TMS Hold Time; TCK to TDI Hold Time 25 ns t4 TCK to TDO Delay Time 50 ns t1 TCK t2 t3 TMS TDI t4 TDO Figure-65 JTAG Timing Physical And Electrical Specifications 141 February 6, 2009 Glossary AIS — Alarm Indication Signal AMI — Alternate Mark Inversion ARB — Arbitrary Pattern B8ZS — Binary 8 Zero Substitution BPV — Bipolar Violation CF — Corner Frequency CV — Code Violation DPLL — Digital Phase Locked Loop EXZ — Excessive Zeroes FIFO — First In First Out HDB3 — High Density Bipolar 3 HPS — Hitless Protection Switching IB — Inband Loopback LAIS — Line Alarm Indication Signal LBPV — Line Bipolar Violation LEXZ — Line Excessive Zeroes LLOS — Line Loss of Signal LOS — Loss Of Signal NRZ — Non-Return to Zero PBX — Private Branch Exchange PRBS — Pseudo Random Bit Sequence QRSS — Quasi-Random Signal Source RJA — Receive Jitter Attenuator RZ — Return to Zero SAIS — System Alarm Indication Signal SBPV — System Bipolar Violation SDH — Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Glossary 142 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT SEXZ — System Excessive Zeroes SLOS — System LOS SONET — Synchronous Optical Network TEPBGA — Thermally Enhanced Plastic Ball Grid Array TJA — Transmit Jitter Attenuator TLOS — Transmit Loss of Signal TOC — Transmit Over Current Glossary 143 February 6, 2009 Index A hitless switch ...................................................................................... 24 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) ............................................................. 42 hot-swap ............................................................................................ 24 hot-switchover .................................................................................... 24 B Bipolar Violation (BPV) ....................................................................... 38 I C impedance matching receive External Impedance Matching ..........................................24, 26 Fully Internal Impedance Matching .......................................... 24 Partially Internal Impedance Matching ..................................... 24 cable coaxial cable ........................................................... 24, 26, 34, 35 twisted pair cable ................................................................. 24, 34 clock input MCLK ......................................................................................... 61 XCLK .......................................................................................... 61 clock output CLKT1/CLKE1 ............................................................................ 56 REFA/REFB ............................................................................... 57 CLKA/CLKB .......................................................................... 57 MCLK ................................................................................... 57 recovery clock ....................................................................... 57 Code Violation (CV) ............................................................................ 38 transmit External Impedance Matching ................................................ 34 Internal Impedance Matching ...........................................34, 35 Interrupt .............................................................................................. 62 J JA-Limit .............................................................................................. 37 Jitter Measurement (JM) .................................................................... 55 JTAG ..........................................................................................22, 113 common control .................................................................................. 19 L Corner Frequency (CF) ...................................................................... 37 line interface .......................................................................... 14, 24, 34 receive Differential ............................................................................ 24 Single Ended ........................................................................ 26 transmit Differential ............................................................................ 34 Single Ended ........................................................................ 35 line monitor ........................................................................................ 27 D decoder .............................................................................................. 28 E encoder .............................................................................................. 30 error counter ....................................................................................... 45 Excessive Zeroes (EXZ) ..................................................................... 38 F free running ................................................................................. 56, 57 G G.772 Monitoring ................................................................................ 54 H loopback Analog Loopback ....................................................................... 49 Digital Loopback ........................................................................ 51 Dual Loopback Manual Remote Loopback + Automatic Digital Loopback ........... 52 Manual Remote Loopback + Manual Digital Loopback .............. 52 Remote Loopback ...................................................................... 50 Loss of Signal (LOS) .......................................................................... 39 Line LOS (LLOS) ....................................................................... 39 System LOS (SLOS) .................................................................. 40 Transmit LOS (TLOS) ................................................................ 41 heatsink ............................................................................................ 115 M high impedance ........................................................14, 24, 29, 34, 36 microprocessor interface ..............................................................20, 65 Hitless Protection Switch (HPS) ......................................................... 24 monitoring Index 144 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT G.772 monitoring ........................................................................ 54 line monitor ................................................................................. 27 P pattern ARB ..................................................................................... 43, 44 Inband Loopback (IB) .......................................................... 43, 45 PRBS ................................................................................... 43, 44 power down ................................................................................. 29, 36 receiver ....................................................................................... 29 transmitter ................................................................................... 36 S slicer ................................................................................................... 28 system interface .................................................................... 15, 28, 29 receive Dual Rail NRZ Format ........................................................... 28 Dual Rail RZ Format .............................................................. 28 Dual Rail Sliced .................................................................... 28 Single Rail NRZ Format ......................................................... 28 transmit Dual Rail NRZ Format ........................................................... 29 Dual Rail RZ Format .............................................................. 29 Single Rail NRZ Format ......................................................... 29 Protected Non-Intrusive Monitoring .................................................... 27 R T T1 / E1 / J1 mode selection ............................................................... 24 receive sensitivity ............................................................................... 27 Transmit Over Current (TOC) ......................................................34, 48 reset global software reset .................................................................. 65 hardware reset ............................................................................ 65 power-on reset ............................................................................ 65 W waveform template ............................................................................. 30 Rx clock & data recovery .................................................................... 28 Index 145 February 6, 2009 IDT82P2816 IDT82P2808A 16(+1) CHANNEL HIGH-DENSITY T1/E1/J1 LINE INTERFACE UNIT ORDERING INFORMATION XXXXXXX XX X Device Type Package Process/Temperature Range BLANK Industrial (-40 °C to +85 °C) BB Plastic Ball Grid Array (416-pin PBGA, BB416) BBG Green Plastic Ball Grid Array (416-pin PBGA, BBG416) 82P2816 16(+1) High-Density T1/E1/J1 Line Interface Unit Data Sheet Document History 12/07/2005 Pages 10, 19, 26, 66, 67, 68, 115, 116, 121, 122, 131 01/11/2007 Page 124 02/06/2009 Pages 18, 56, 61 CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS 6024 Silver Creek Valley Road San Jose, CA 95138 for SALES: 1-800-345-7015 or 408-284-8200 fax: 408-284-2775 www.idt.com IDT and the IDT logo are trademarks of Integrated Device Technology, Inc. 146 for Tech Support: 408-360-1552 email:TELECOMhelp@idt.com IMPORTANT NOTICE AND DISCLAIMER RENESAS ELECTRONICS CORPORATION AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES (“RENESAS”) PROVIDES TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND RELIABILITY DATA (INCLUDING DATASHEETS), DESIGN RESOURCES (INCLUDING REFERENCE DESIGNS), APPLICATION OR OTHER DESIGN ADVICE, WEB TOOLS, SAFETY INFORMATION, AND OTHER RESOURCES “AS IS” AND WITH ALL FAULTS, AND DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. These resources are intended for developers skilled in the art designing with Renesas products. You are solely responsible for (1) selecting the appropriate products for your application, (2) designing, validating, and testing your application, and (3) ensuring your application meets applicable standards, and any other safety, security, or other requirements. These resources are subject to change without notice. Renesas grants you permission to use these resources only for development of an application that uses Renesas products. Other reproduction or use of these resources is strictly prohibited. No license is granted to any other Renesas intellectual property or to any third party intellectual property. Renesas disclaims responsibility for, and you will fully indemnify Renesas and its representatives against, any claims, damages, costs, losses, or liabilities arising out of your use of these resources. Renesas' products are provided only subject to Renesas' Terms and Conditions of Sale or other applicable terms agreed to in writing. No use of any Renesas resources expands or otherwise alters any applicable warranties or warranty disclaimers for these products. (Rev.1.0 Mar 2020) Corporate Headquarters Contact Information TOYOSU FORESIA, 3-2-24 Toyosu, Koto-ku, Tokyo 135-0061, Japan www.renesas.com For further information on a product, technology, the most up-to-date version of a document, or your nearest sales office, please visit: www.renesas.com/contact/ Trademarks Renesas and the Renesas logo are trademarks of Renesas Electronics Corporation. All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. © 2020 Renesas Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved.